ADR-10000-I&M MANUAL - 8.1 253359436-A - Ed01

ADD-DROP MULTIPLEXER STM-64
ADR – 10000
Installation and Maintenance Manual
Versions 8.1
253 359 436-A
3 000 358 607 R11 000 01
September 2010 Issue

LIST OF CHANGES
(A new edition replaces any previous versions)
No Date Change description Page
253 359 436 September 2010 Creation of original user guide All pages
3 000 358 607 R11 000 01
Contents
About This Manual..................................................................... xi
Overview..............................................................................................................xi
Intended Audience...............................................................................................xi
Document Organization ......................................................................................xii
Document Conventions ......................................................................................xii
Related Documentation ..................................................................................... xiii
Obtaining Technical Documentation.................................................................. xiii
Technical Assistance xiv
Before You Start/Safety Guidelines .......................................1-1

Overview........................................................................................................... 1-1
Warning Definition ............................................................................................ 1-3
Qualified Personnel Warning ............................................................................ 1-4
Installation Warning .......................................................................................... 1-5
General Safety Requirements .......................................................................... 1-5
Jewelry Removal Warning ................................................................................ 1-7
Grounding Requirements.................................................................................. 1-8
Power Supply Requirements .......................................................................... 1-11
UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements ............................................. 1-18
ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements................................. 1-20
Laser Safety Requirements ............................................................................ 1-22
Protection against Electrostatic Discharge ..................................................... 1-26
Environmental and Health Concerns ............................................................. 1-29
Introduction..............................................................................2-1
ADR-10000 Platform Overview ........................................................................ 2-1
ADR-10000 I/O Protection Options .................................................................. 2-2
ADR-10000 Shelf with CWDM Networking Capabilities ................................... 2-6
Site Preparation and Rack Installation ..................................3-1

Overview........................................................................................................... 3-1
Tools and Test Equipment................................................................................ 3-4
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................... 3-5
ADR Rack Installation Options ......................................................................... 3-6
Preparing Cables and Fibers ............................................................................ 3-7
ADR-10000 Accessories................................................................................. 3-18
Equipment Installation .................................................................................... 3-28
Rack Installation ............................................................................................. 3-37
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ................................................................... 3-42
Platform Installation ................................................................4-1

Installation Options ........................................................................................... 4-1
Installing the ADR-10000 Shelf in Racks.......................................................... 4-7
ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page i
Grounding the ADR-10000 Shelf.................................................................. 4-222
Card and Module Installation..................................................5-1

Installing ADR-10000 Cards ............................................................................. 5-1
Installing ADR-10000 Modules ....................................................................... 5-10
Installing TPU Modules................................................................................... 5-19
Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR-10000 Shelf............................................... 5-25
Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing.................6-1

Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks .............................................. 6-1
Commissioning Tests .............................................................7-1

Overview........................................................................................................... 7-1
Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 7-2
Site Commissioning Tests ................................................................................ 7-3
Network Commissioning Tests ......................................................................... 7-6
Maintenance .............................................................................8-1
Overview........................................................................................................... 8-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials............................................... 8-1
Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................... 8-2
Traffic Monitoring System ................................................................................. 8-6
Onsite Troubleshooting................................................................................... 8-10
Replacing Cards and Modules........................................................................ 8-17
Replacing RAP Components .......................................................................... 8-23
Connector Pin Assignments.................................................. A-1

Overview...........................................................................................................A-1
ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors ..............................................................A-1
MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors ..............................................................A-7
PIM2_21 Connection Data................................................................................A-8
PIM2_42 Connection Data..............................................................................A-11
PIM2_63/B Connection Data ..........................................................................A-17
EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors...................................................................A-21
xRAP-D/xRAP-B Connectors..........................................................................A-22
Standards Compliance........................................................... B-1

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page ii
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding post ........................1-9
Figure 1-2: Grounding the optical rack to the site grounding bar.................................1-10
Figure 1-3: ADR-10000 TUV CE label .........................................................................1-18
Figure 1-4: Power input warning label..........................................................................1-18
Figure 1-5: Basic ESD warning symbol........................................................................1-26
Figure 1-6: ADR-10000 typical temporary EPA arrangement......................................1-28
Figure 1-7: Pollution control logos................................................................................1-31
Figure 1-8: WEEE recycling symbol.............................................................................1-31
Figure 2-1: ADR-10000 shelf..........................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2: Basic ADR-10000 shelf, horizontal installation............................................2-3
Figure 2-3: Basic ADR-10000 shelf, vertical Installation................................................2-4
Figure 2-4: ADR-10000 with one TPU on top of the shelf..............................................2-5
Figure 2-5: ADR-10000 with two TPUs ..........................................................................2-5
Figure 2-6: ADR-10000 with an OCU and two TPUs .....................................................2-6
Figure 3-1: ADR-10000 horizontal installation space dimension ...................................3-3
Figure 3-2: xRAP-B front panel ....................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-3: xRAP-B connectors....................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-4: xRAP-D power supply flow ........................................................................3-22
Figure 3-5: xRAP-D front panel ....................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-6: xRAP-D connectors ...................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-7: Components of ADR-10000 horizontal installation....................................3-30
Figure 3-8: Components of ADR-10000 vertical installation ........................................3-33
Figure 3-9: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks ............................................................3-39
Figure 3-10: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks................................................3-40
Figure 3-11: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead tray.....3-41
Figure 3-16: Example of an approved European 19" rack ...........................................3-42
Figure 3-17: xRAP-D power supply flow ......................................................................3-45
Figure 3-18: xRAP-D power supply with bridge, two variations ...................................3-46
Figure 3-19: Location of xRAP-D grounding stud ........................................................3-47
Figure 3-20: xRAP-D power supply flow ......................................................................3-48
Figure 3-21: Identification of xRAP-D cable routes ......................................................3-49
Figure 3-22: Connecting DC power cables ..................................................................3-50
Figure 3-23: Side screws highlighted on left side of xRAP-D unit................................3-52
Figure 3-24: Replacement spacer screw .....................................................................3-52
Figure 3-25: Replacement spacer screws in place in xRAP-D unit .............................3-53
Figure 3-26: Protection cover for xRAP-D....................................................................3-53
Figure 3-27: xRAP-D protective covers in place ..........................................................3-54
Figure 3-28: Bottom panel for xRAP-D ........................................................................3-54
Figure 3-29: xRAP-D connectors .................................................................................3-55

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page iii
Figure 3-30: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers ....................................................3-56
Figure 3-31: Location of xRAP-B grounding stud.........................................................3-60
Figure 3-32: Identification of xRAP-B cable routes ......................................................3-60
Figure 3-33: Connecting DC power cables ..................................................................3-61
Figure 3-34: Side screw highlighted on left side of the xRAP-B ..................................3-62
Figure 3-35: Replacement spacer screw .....................................................................3-62
Figure 3-36: Replacement spacer screw in place in the xRAP-B ................................3-63
Figure 3-37: Protective cover for xRAP-B ....................................................................3-63
Figure 3-38: xRAP-B protective cover in place ............................................................3-64
Figure 3-39: Bottom panel for xRAP-B.........................................................................3-64
Figure 3-40: xRAP-B connectors..................................................................................3-65
Figure 3-41: Installation of xRAP-B circuit breakers ....................................................3-66
Figure 3-54: Cable guide..............................................................................................3-68
Figure 3-55: Fiber guide ...............................................................................................3-69
Figure 3-56: Cable slack tray .......................................................................................3-69
Figure 3-57: Threading optical fibers in the FST..........................................................3-70
Figure 3-58: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF..............................................3-71
Figure 3-59: ODF front panel .......................................................................................3-72
Figure 3-60: ODF open view ........................................................................................3-72
Figure 3-61: ODF fiber routes ......................................................................................3-73
Figure 3-62: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP ...............................3-75
Figure 4-1: Typical ADR-10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack......................4-2
Figure 4-2: Typical horizontal installation of two ADR-10000 shelves ...........................4-3
Figure 4-3: Typical horizontal installation of three basic ADR-10000 shelves...............4-4
Figure 4-4: Typical horizontal installation of three ADR-10000 shelves with TPUs.......4-5
Figure 4-5: Typical ADR-10000 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack ..........................4-6
Figure 4-6: ETSI A rack closed view ..............................................................................4-9
Figure 4-7: Typical ADR-10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack....................4-11
Figure 4-8: Installing the vertical lower bracket............................................................4-14
Figure 4-9: Preparing the filter frame assembly ...........................................................4-15
Figure 4-10: Installing the filter frame assembly ..........................................................4-16
Figure 4-11: Installing the vertical upper bracket .........................................................4-17
Figure 4-12: Installing the thumbnuts...........................................................................4-18
Figure 4-13: Releasing the thumbnuts .........................................................................4-19
Figure 4-14: Lowering the filter frame ..........................................................................4-20
Figure 4-15: Filter frame in lower position....................................................................4-21
Figure 4-16: Inserting the air filter ................................................................................4-22
Figure 4-17: ADR-10000 shelf and rack grounding......................................................4-24
Figure 5-1: Installing the FCU300 ..................................................................................5-2
Figure 5-2: Installing the ECU300/ECU300-F ................................................................5-3
Figure 5-3: Installing the MXC300..................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-4: Installing the NVM in the MXC300...............................................................5-5

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page iv
Figure 5-5: Installing a quad I/O card.............................................................................5-6
Figure 5-6: Removing a module guide ...........................................................................5-8
Figure 5-7: Installing the SIM64_XFP right adapter.......................................................5-9
Figure 5-8: Installing the SIM64_XFP left adapter .........................................................5-9
Figure 5-9: Installing a SIM64_XFP in a quad I/O slot.................................................5-10
Figure 5-10: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O slots ...................................................5-12
Figure 5-11: Installing the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter.............................................5-13
Figure 5-12: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module.............................5-15
Figure 5-13: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the ADR-10000 .................5-17
Figure 5-14: Removing the module guide ....................................................................5-17
Figure 5-15: Inserting the TC module (ADR-10000) ....................................................5-19
Figure 5-16: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR-10000)..............................5-20
Figure 5-17: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR-10000) ............................5-22
Figure 5-18: Removing a TPM guide ...........................................................................5-22
Figure 5-19: Inserting a triple-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR-10000) ...............................5-24
Figure 5-20: Removing the TPU connector from the ADR-10000 ...............................5-26
Figure 5-21: Inserting the TPU connector onto the ADR-10000 ..................................5-27
Figure 5-22: Installing the pin guides in the TPU .........................................................5-27
Figure 5-23: Lowering the TPU onto the ADR-10000 ..................................................5-28
Figure 5-24: Securing the TPU onto the ADR-10000 ..................................................5-28
Figure 5-25: Installing the ADR-10000 pin guides and removing the lower connector
cover.............................................................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-26: Assembling the TPU bracket and jumper connector ...............................5-30
Figure 5-27: Lowering the ADR-10000 onto the TPU ..................................................5-31
Figure 5-28: Securing the lower TPU to the shelf ........................................................5-31
Figure 5-29: Removing the connector cover and fastening bracket from the first
TPU/OCU .....................................................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-30: Installing the pin guides in the TPU .........................................................5-33
Figure 5-31: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector onto the first TPU/OCU in the ADR-
10000............................................................................................................................5-34
Figure 5-32: Lowering the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR-10000 ...........5-35
Figure 5-33: Securing the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR-10000............5-35
Figure 6-1: Routing cables and fibers in an ETSI A rack ...............................................6-2
Figure 6-2: ADR-10000 1:1 protection scheme example.............................................6-10
Figure 6-5: TPM2_42_2 protection slot allocation in ADR-10000................................6-13
Figure 6-7: Connecting to a TPMH_1 protection with an ADR-10000 .........................6-15
Figure 6-8: ADR-10000 with 252 E1s in 1:2 protection connections ...........................6-16
Figure 6-9: RJ-45 extractor ..........................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-10: Inserting the cables (upper row) ..............................................................6-21
Figure 6-11: Attaching the extractor to the handle (upper row) ...................................6-21

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page v
Figure 6-12: Extracting the connector (upper row).......................................................6-22
Figure 6-13: Inserting the cables (lower row)...............................................................6-22
Figure 6-14: Attaching the extractor to the handle (lower row) ....................................6-23
Figure 6-15: Extracting the connector (lower row) .......................................................6-23
Figure 6-16: LC/SFP extractor .....................................................................................6-24
Figure 6-17: Inserting the fiber into the extractor .........................................................6-24
Figure 6-18: Pressing extractor's release tab onto SFP's clip .....................................6-25
Figure 6-19: Extracting the LC connector ....................................................................6-25
Figure 6-20: Moving the connector beyond the tab .....................................................6-25
Figure 6-21: Removing the fiber...................................................................................6-26
Figure 6-22: Inserting the fiber into extractor's narrow end..........................................6-26
Figure 6-23: Moving extractor's end to the connector..................................................6-26
Figure 6-24: Inserting the connector into the SFP .......................................................6-27
Figure 6-25: Moving the extractor backward................................................................6-27
Figure 6-26: Removing the extractor from the fiber .....................................................6-27
Figure 6-27: Orienting the extractor in front of the SFP ...............................................6-28
Figure 6-28: Moving the extractor forward ...................................................................6-28
Figure 6-29: Fitting SFP's partition into extractor's slot................................................6-28
Figure 6-30: Moving extractor toward SFP clip ............................................................6-29
Figure 6-31: Pulling the extractor backward with grasped clip.....................................6-29
Figure 6-32: Locking the clip between lever and extractor's teeth...............................6-29
Figure 6-33: Releasing the SFP from housing .............................................................6-30
Figure 6-34: Extracting the SFP ...................................................................................6-30
Figure 6-35: DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor................................................................................6-31
Figure 6-36: Placing the extractor in front of the connector .........................................6-31
Figure 6-37: Attaching the extractor to the connector's step........................................6-32
Figure 6-38: Extracting the connector ..........................................................................6-32
Figure 6-39: Inserting the coaxial cable into the extractor ...........................................6-33
Figure 6-40: Positioning the connector in the extractor ...............................................6-33
Figure 6-41: Inserting the connector ............................................................................6-34
Figure 6-42: Removing the extractor............................................................................6-34
Figure 7-1: Optical commissioning tests setup ............................................................7-21
Figure 8-1: Inserting the air filter ....................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-2: ECU300-F monitoring system interface.......................................................8-6
Figure 8-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module..........................................8-7
Figure 8-4: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module...............................8-22
Figure 8-6: Replacing the xRAP-B circuit breakers......................................................8-24
Figure 8-7: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers ......................................................8-25
Figure A-1: ALARMS connector pin identification ......................................................... A-2
Figure A-2: F-CHANNEL connector pin identification ................................................... A-5
Figure A-3: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin identification ........................... A-6
Figure A-4: ETHERNET connectors pin identification................................................... A-7

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page vi
Figure A-5: POWER input power connector pin functions ............................................ A-7
Figure A-6: PIM2_21 E1 connectors pin identification .................................................. A-8
Figure A-7: PIM2_42 E1 connectors pin identification ................................................ A-11
Figure A-8: PIM2_63/B typical pair connectors pin identification................................ A-17
Figure A-9: 10/100BaseT connectors pin identification .............................................. A-21
Figure A-14: xRAP-D and xRAP-B shelf DC input power connector pin functions..... A-22
Figure A-15: SHELF alarm connector pin identification .............................................. A-22
Figure A-16: ALARMS connector pin identification ..................................................... A-24

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page vii
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Equipment dimensions..................................................................................3-2
Table 3-2: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools...............................................3-4
Table 3-3: Equipment rack data .....................................................................................3-6
Table 3-5: Traffic cables mating connector data ..........................................................3-13
Table 3-6: Patch traffic cables connecting I/O modules to the TPU ............................3-14
Table 3-7: Optical fibers and mating connector data ...................................................3-15
Table 3-8: EISM optical fibers and mating connector data ..........................................3-16
Table 3-9: EISMB Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data....................3-16
Table 3-10: DIOM optical fibers and mating connector data........................................3-16
Table 3-11: DIOM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data ...................3-17
Table 3-12: MCSM optical fibers and mating connector data ......................................3-17
Table 3-13: MCSM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data..................3-17
Table 3-14: xRAP-B front panel component functions .................................................3-20
Table 3-15: xRAP-B connector functions .....................................................................3-21
Table 3-16: xRAP-D front panel component functions.................................................3-24
Table 3-17: xRAP-D connector functions.....................................................................3-25
Table 3-20: RAP features.............................................................................................3-27
Table 3-21: Outline of ADR-10000 horizontal installation sequence ...........................3-31
Table 3-22: Outline of vertical ADR-10000 installation sequence................................3-33
Table 3-23: ADR-10000 recommended circuit breakers..............................................3-66
Table 6-1: ADR-10000 protection schemes ...................................................................6-9
Table 6-2: ADR-10000 1:1 I/O protection.....................................................................6-10
Table 6-5: TPM2_42_2 and PIM2_42 slot assignment in the ADR-10000 ..................6-13
Table 7-1: Card and module inventory...........................................................................7-3
Table 7-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks ....................................................7-4
Table 7-3: Measured optical levels ................................................................................7-5
Table 7-4: Traffic stability test time intervals ................................................................7-10
Table 7-5: Throughput and latency test results............................................................7-17
Table 7-6: Frame loss rate test results.........................................................................7-19
Table 7-7: BER and Stability Test time intervals..........................................................7-25
Table 8-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks...........................................8-2
Table 8-2: I/O modules monitoring data.........................................................................8-9
Table 8-3: Troubleshooting power problems................................................................8-11
Table 8-4: General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules.............................8-12
Table 8-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins .........8-12
Table 8-6: Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules .....................8-13

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page ix
Table 8-7: Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and Mux/DeMux ...............8-13
Table 8-8: Troubleshooting procedures for EISMs ......................................................8-13
Table 8-9: Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem .....................................8-14
Table 8-10: Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms ......................................8-15
Table 8-11: Troubleshooting management communication.........................................8-16
Table A-1: ALARMS connector pin assignment............................................................ A-2
Table A-2: ALARMS client cable wiring ........................................................................ A-4
Table A-4: F-CHANNEL connector pin assignment ...................................................... A-5
Table A-5: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin assignment.............................. A-6
Table A-6: ETHERNET connectors pin assignment ..................................................... A-7
Table A-7: PIM2_21 receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment .......................... A-8
Table A-8: PIM2_21 transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment........................ A-10
Table A-9: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines upper connector (1-21) pin assignment .. A-11
Table A-10: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines lower connector (22-42) pin assignmentA-14
Table A-11: PIM2_63/B typical receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment........ A-17
Table A-12: PIM2_63 typical transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment .......... A-19
Table A-13: 10/100BaseT connectors pin assignment ............................................... A-21
Table A-14: 1000BaseT connector pin assignment .................................................... A-21
Table A-18: SHELF alarm connector pin assignment................................................. A-22
Table A-19: ALARMS connector pin assignment........................................................ A-25

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page x
About This Manual
In this chapter:
Overview............................................................................................................ xi
Intended Audience ............................................................................................. xi
Document Organization....................................................................................xii
Document Conventions..................................................................................... xii
Related Documentation....................................................................................xiii
Obtaining Technical Documentation ...............................................................xiii
Technical Assistance........................................................................................ xiv
Overview
The ADR-10000 Installation and Maintenance Manual (IMM) describes how to
set up, configure, and install ADR-10000 shelves and their components and
accessories.
The manual also provides task-oriented instructions for LED indications,
troubleshooting hardware-related problems, and replacing hardware
components (cards, modules, accessories).
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for installation and other qualified service personnel
responsible for installing the system and its accessories.
The instructions require you to understand and follow the safety practices
included here, as well as any applicable national regulations and those enforced
at your site. They also require that you understand the physical, optical, and
electrical requirements of the installation site.

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xi
Document Organization
This manual contains the following information:
| Installation
| Maintenance
| Additional functionality
Document Conventions
When applicable, this manual uses the following conventions.
Convention Indicates Example
Bold Names of windows, In the Alarms menu...
dialog boxes, menus,
buttons and most other
GUI elements
Menu > Option Selection from a menu, or Select Update > View
leading to another Objects
command
Italics New terms and Examples in text
emphasized text
Borders around text Notes, cautions, and See examples below
warnings
NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or
interesting points of information.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or
loss of information.
WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xii
LASER WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates
how to avoid personal injury. All personnel involved in
equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be
aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although
protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the
beam, personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety
precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical
connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.
ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on

how to avoid discharge of static electricity and subsequent
damage to the unit.
TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information

and handy hints that can make your task easier.
IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential

information to which you must pay attention.
Obtaining Technical
Documentation
To obtain technical documentation related to the ADR-10000 or any other
Sagemcom product, please contact:
Registered office: 250, route de l'Empereur, 92848 RUEIL MALMAISON CEDEX

Tel.: +33 (0) 1 57 61 10 00 - Fax: +33 (0)1 57 61 10 10
http://www.sagemcom.com

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xiii
Technical Assistance
The configuration, installation, and operation of the ADR-10000 and its
operation in a network are highly specialized processes. Due to the different
nature of each installation, some planning aspects may not be covered in this
manual.
If you have questions or concerns about your network design or if you require
installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, SAGEMCOM
maintains a staff of design engineers and highly trained field service personnel.
The services of this group are available to customers at any time.
If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation
plan from SAGEMCOM' Customer Support team, contact your SAGEMCOM
sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic,
please contact the SAGEMCOM Customer Support center at your location.
If you are not familiar with that location, please contact our central customer
support center action line at:
Telephone 33 1 57 61 16 16
Telefax 33 1 57 61 16 60
Email hotline.arp@sagemcom.com
Don't forget to provide yourself with your customer number which is written on
your invoice

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xiv
1
Before You Start/Safety
Guidelines
In this chapter:
Overview..........................................................................................................1-1
Warning Definition ..........................................................................................1-3
Qualified Personnel Warning...........................................................................1-4
Installation Warning ........................................................................................1-5
General Safety Requirements ..........................................................................1-5
Jewelry Removal Warning...............................................................................1-7
Grounding Requirements.................................................................................1-8
Power Supply Requirements..........................................................................1-11
UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements...........................................1-18
ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements...............................1-20
Laser Safety Requirements ............................................................................1-22
Protection against Electrostatic Discharge.....................................................1-26
Environmental and Health Concerns .............................................................1-29
Overview
This chapter describes the ADR safety guidelines. The safety rules and
warnings in this chapter must be read before beginning any platform
installation or maintenance work. These safety guidelines must be adhered to
carefully.
WARNING: ADR equipment (the "ADR Equipment" or the

"Equipment") is intended for installation in restricted access
areas only.

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-1
WARNING: ADR Equipment has two power sources.
Disconnect both before servicing.
Before starting installation, make sure that the DC power is
not connected to the rack, and that the circuit breakers in the
xRAP or in the user-provided power distribution panel are set
to OFF.
NOTE: This chapter includes translations of some of the

warnings that appear in this guide. The translated warnings
are presented with the English text first, followed by these
languages:
| Danish
| Dutch
| Finnish
| French
| German
| Italian
| Portuguese
| Spanish
| Swedish

Warning Definition
WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could
result in severe bodily injury. Before you work on any Equipment, be
aware of the potential electrical hazards and become familiar with
accident prevention measures.
ADVARSEL: Dette symbol betyder fare. Der er risiko for alvorlig
legemsbeskadigelse. Vær opmærksom på potentielle elektriske risici, og
sæt dig ind i forholdsreglerne til uheldsforebyggelse, før du arbejder på
nogen form for udstyr.
WAARSCHUWING: Dit symbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een
situatie die ernstig lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u met de
apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van mogelijke
elektriciteitsrisico’s en zich op de hoogte te stellen van maatregelen ter
voorkoming van ongelukken.
VAROITUS: Tämä merkki tarkoittaa vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi
johtaa vakavaan loukkaantumiseen. Ennen kuin käytät mitään laitetta, ota
huomioon mahdolliset sähköiset vaaratekijät ja tutustu ennalta
onnettomuuden ehkäisemisohjeisiin.
ATTENTION: Ce symbole est signe de danger. Vous risquez de graves
blessures corporelles. Avant de travailler sur un appareil, vous devez
avoir conscience des risques électriques encourus et vous familiariser
avec les mesures de prévention des accidents.
WARNUNG: Dieses Symbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer
Situation, die zu schwerwiegenden Verletzungen führen kann. Bedenken
Sie vor dem Gebrauch der Geräte mögliche Gefahren durch elektrischen
Strom und machen Sie sich mit den Maßnahmen zur Unfallverhütung
vertraut.
AVVERTENZA: Questo simbolo indica una situazione di pericolo. Tale
situazione potrebbe provocare gravi danni fisici. Prima di utilizzare
qualsiasi dispositivo, fare attenzione ai potenziali rischi elettrici e
acquisire familiarità con le eventuali misure di prevenzione.
AVISO: Este símbolo significa perigo. Encontra-se numa situação em
que a sua saúde corre sérios riscos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com o
equipamento, verifique o risco potencial de choque eléctrico e
familiarize-se com as medidas de prevenção de acidente.
ADVERTENCIA: Este símbolo significa peligro. Está expuesto a sufrir
daños corporales serios. Antes de utilizar el equipo, tenga en cuenta la
posibilidad de riesgo eléctrico potencial y lea atentamente las medidas de
prevención de accidentes.
VARNING: Denna symbol betyder livsfara. Du befinner dig i en
situation som kan leda till allvarliga kroppsskador. Innan du arbetar med
utrustningen måste du vara medveten om potentiella faror och känna till
olycksförebyggande åtgärder.

Qualified Personnel Warning
WARNING: Only trained, qualified personnel should install, maintain, or
replace the Equipment.
ADVARSEL: Kun uddannet, kvalificeret personale må installere,
vedligeholde eller udskifte udstyr.
WAARSCHUWING: Installatie, onderhoud of vervanging van de
apparatuur mag uitsluitend worden uitgevoerd door opgeleid en bevoegd
personeel.
VAROITUS: Vain koulutettu, pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa, ylläpitää
tai vaihtaa laitteella.
ATTENTION: Seules des personnes formées et qualifiées sont habilitées
à installer, entretenir ou changer l'équipements.
WARNUNG: Nur geschultes, qualifiziertes Personal sollte den
Ausrüstung installieren, warten oder ersetzen.
AVVERTENZA: Il apparecchiature può essere installato, controllato o
sostituito solo da personale qualificato.
AVISO: Só pessoal especializado e qualificado deve instalar, fazer a
manutenção ou substituir o equipamento.
ADVERTENCIA: La instalación, el mantenimiento y la sustitución de
este equipo sólo deberá realizarlo personal cualificado.
VARNING: Endast utbildad, kvalificerad personal får installera,
underhålla eller ersätta utrustning.

Installation Warning
WARNING: Before you connect the Equipment to a power source, read
the installation information in this guide.
ADVARSEL: Gennemlæs installationsoplysningerne i denne vejledning,
før udstyr sluttes til en strømkilde.
WAARSCHUWING: Lees de aanwijzingen voor de installatie in deze
handleiding voordat u de apparatuur aansluit op een voedingsbron.
VAROITUS: Ennen kuin liität laitteella virtalähteeseen, lue asennusohjeet
tästä oppaasta.
ATTENTION: Avant de brancher l'équipements à une source
d'alimentation, lisez les instructions d'installation de ce manuel.
WARNUNG: Lesen Sie die Hinweise zur Installation in diesem
Handbuch, bevor Sie den Ausrüstung an eine Stromquelle anschließen.
AVVERTENZA: Prima di collegare il apparecchiature alla presa di
alimentazione, leggere le informazioni relative all'installazione riportate
in questa guida.
AVISO: Antes de ligar o equipamento a uma fonte de energia, leia as
instruções para instalação neste guia.
ADVERTENCIA: Antes de conectar el equipo a la fuente de
alimentación, lea la información sobre instalación en esta guía.
VARNING: Innan du ansluter utrustning till en strömkälla ska du läsa
installationsinformationen i denna handbok.
General Safety Requirements

ADR platforms contain power sources of varying voltages. Make sure to install
the platforms in compliance with the following guidelines:
| Be sure to use the Equipment in restricted access locations only.
| Note that the Equipment racks and ADR platforms are suitable for
mounting on concrete or other noncombustible surfaces only.
| Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections.
| ADR platforms must be installed in accordance with the National Electrical
Code.
| Make sure that sufficient lighting is available while working on the
Equipment.
| Do not work on any Equipment when it is connected to a voltage source
(DC or AC), except for inserting/removing cards or modules; these
activities can be performed on operating Equipment.
| Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 50°C.

| Use only insulated tools during installation.
| Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations.
| Do not install or maintain Equipment connected to external lines (for
example, electrical tributaries) during thunderstorms.
| Avoid contact with high voltage sources when installing platforms, cards,
and modules.
| Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels affixed to
the Equipment, and strictly observe the procedures to avoid the indicated
hazards.

Jewelry Removal Warning
WARNING: Before you work on Equipment that is connected to power
lines, remove any jewelry (including rings, necklaces, and watches). When
connected to power and ground, metal objects may heat up and cause
serious burns or weld the objects to the terminals.
ADVARSEL: Før du arbejder på udstyr, der er sluttet til strømledninger,
skal du tage evt. smykker af (f.eks. ringe, halskæder og ure). Ved tilslutning
til strøm og jord kan metalobjekter blive varme og forårsage alvorlige
forbrændinger, eller objekterne kan blive svejset fast til terminalerne.
WAARSCHUWING: Voordat u aan apparatuur gaat werken die met
elektrische leidingen is verbonden, dient u sieraden (zoals ringen, kettingen
en horloges) af te doen. Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer deze
met stroom en aarde verbonden zijn en kunnen ernstige brandwonden
veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen vastlassen.
VAROITUS: Ennen kuin työskentelet laitteella, joka on kytketty
virtajohtoihin, riisu kaikki korut (mukaanlukien sormukset, kaulanauhat ja
rannekellot). Ollessaan kosketuksissa sekä sähkövirtaan että maahan,
metalliesineet saattavat kuumentua ja aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai
hitsautua kiinni napoihin.
ATTENTION: Avant de travailler sur un équipement connecté au secteur,
enlevez tous vos bijoux (y compris les bagues, les colliers et les montres).
Lorsque vous êtes connecté au secteur et à la masse, les objets métalliques
peuvent chauffer et causer de sérieuses brûlures ou se souder à l'appareil.
WARNUNG: Legen Sie jeglichen Schmuck (wie Ringe, Ketten und Uhren)
ab, bevor Sie bei bestehender Stromzufuhr an dem Gerät arbeiten. Wenn
eine Verbindung zur Stromversorgung und zur Masse besteht, können sich
Gegenstände aus Metall erhitzen und Verbrennungen verursachen oder an
die Anschlüsse angeschweißt werden.
AVVERTENZA: Prima di utilizzare apparecchiature collegate
all'alimentazione, togliersi anelli, collane e orologi e altri oggetti. Dopo aver
eseguito il collegamento all'alimentazione e la messa a terra, tali oggetti
metallici possono riscaldarsi e provocare la fusione di oggetti sui terminali.
AVISO: Antes de iniciar o trabalho com o equipamento que estiver ligado à
corrente eléctrica, retire qualquer tipo de artigos de joalharia (tais como
anéis, colares e relógios). Quando estão ligados à corrente e à terra, os
objectos em metal podem aquecer e provocar graves queimaduras ou até
mesmo ficar soldados aos terminais de corrente.
ADVERTENCIA: Antes de trabajar con un equipo que esté conectado a la
alimentación, deberá uitarse todas las joyas que lleve (incluidos anillos,
collares y relojes). Los objetos metálicos que estén conectados a la
alimentación y a una toma de tierra, se podrían calentar y causar
quemaduras graves o soldar objetos a los terminales.
VARNING: Innan du utför arbete på utrustning som är ansluten till
nätsladdar ska du ta av smycken (inkl. ringar, halsband och klockor). När
apparaten är ansluten till ström och jord kan metallföremål bli heta och
orsaka allvarliga brännskador eller svetsa fast föremålen till terminalerna.

Grounding Requirements
All equipment, including ADR platforms, ancillary units, and equipment from
other vendors, must be properly grounded at all times. Good grounding is
necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize noise, and allow the
discharge of accumulated static charges to earth.
Proper operation of the ADR Equipment requires that the positive supply line
be connected to the common ground (CGND) of the site at the power source, in
accordance with ETS300132-2.
WARNING: When installing the Equipment, the ground connection must

always be made first and disconnected last.
ADVARSEL: Når udstyr installeres, skal jordledningen altid monteres
først og afmonteres sidst.
WAARSCHUWING: Bij het installeren van de apparatuur moet de aarde
als eerste worden aangesloten en als laatste worden afgekoppeld.
VAROITUS: Kun reititintä asennetaan, maaliitäntä pitää aina tehdä ensin
ja laitteella viimeisenä.
ATTENTION: Lors de l'installation des équipements, la mise à la terre
doit toujours être effectuée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
WARNUNG: Bei der Installation des Ausrüstung muss der Masseleiter
stets zuerst angeschlossen und zuletzt entfernt werden.
AVVERTENZA: Durante l'installazione del apparecchiature, la
connessione a terra deve essere eseguita per prima e disconnessa per
ultima.
AVISO: Ao instalar o equipamento, a ligação à terra deve ser sempre a
primeira a ser ligada e a última a ser desligada.
ADVERTENCIA: Al instalar el equipo, la conexión de tierra se deberá
hacer en primer lugar y se deberá desconectar en último lugar.
VARNING: När du installerar utrustning måste jordsladden kopplas in
först och kopplas ur sist.

Rack Grounding Requirements
The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt ('grounding
stud') welded to the rack frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by
the ground symbol label. The stud must be free of paint. The rack also has a
rack grounding bar, which includes a set of grounding connection points for
grounding all the different equipment used in the rack. The following figure
highlights the rack grounding stud and rack grounding bar on an optical rack
used in a typical ADR-10000 installation.
Figure 1-1: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding post

A connection must be made between the rack grounding bar and the site
grounding bar in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations. For example,
grounding may be completed by means of a copper cable with green/yellow
insulation having the same diameter as the power feeding cables or thicker, and
as short as possible. A length of appropriate 50 mm2 grounding cable is
included with the platform accessories. A different connection bar may also be
used, as long as the grounding connection is in compliance with UL/ETSI
recommendations. The rack grounding stud is connected to the rack grounding
bar by means of a metal panel. These rack grounding connections are
highlighted in the following figure.
Figure 1-2: Grounding the optical rack to the site grounding bar

Equipment Grounding Requirements
Each equipment unit mounted on the rack is grounded to the rack frame by the
retaining bolts and nuts attaching the unit to the rack frame.
Equipment grounding is performed via the mounting brackets to the rack rails.
The mounting bracket's internal surface facing the rails and the equipment must
be free of paint and provide electrical continuity to the equipment frame. Check
that the resistance between any mounting bracket and the equipment frame
(chassis) is lower than 0.1 Ω.
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to ADR equipment,

all racks and equipment must be completely grounded
before connecting to the platform any external devices
powered from an AC source (110/220 V). All grounding
procedures described in Grounding the ADR-10000 Shelf (on
page 4-22) must be completed before, for example,
connecting an external PC to configure and initialize the NE
management system.
Power Supply Requirements

Connection via xRAP
ADR platforms require two power sources with nominal voltage of -48 VDC
ranging to -57.6 VDC, having the positive line connected to the site ground.
Each power source must be protected by a UL-listed circuit breaker installed in
the xRAP. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation kit
supplied with the Equipment, and their current ratings are therefore in
accordance with the order.
In addition, the site operator must provide a readily accessible UL-listed
disconnect device incorporated in the fixed power wiring of the site. The device
must limit the maximum delivered current to a safe value.

DC Power Warnings
WARNING: When connecting power, follow this wiring sequence: ground

to ground, positive lead to +RTN terminal, and negative lead to -48 V
terminal. To disconnect power, perform the sequence in reverse order. The
ground wire should always be connected first and disconnected last.
NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power,
the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a red cable, and the
negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671
(GB), and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards the positive lead (+48 V) should
be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray
cable. In the sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables
with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of
residence.
ADVARSEL: Ledningsføring ved strømtilslutning: Jord til jord, positiv
ledning til +RTN-terminalen og negativ ledning til -48V-terminalen.
Foretag dette i omvendt rækkefølge ved frakobling af strømmen.
Jordledningen skal altid monteres først og afmonteres sidst.
WAARSCHUWING: Houd u bij het aansluiten van de stroom aan de
volgende bedradingsvolgorde: aarde naar aarde, de positieve draad naar de
klem +RTN en de negatieve draad naar de klem -48 V. Voor het afkoppelen
past u de omgekeerde volgorde toe. De aarddraad moet altijd het eerst
worden aangesloten en het laatst worden afgekoppeld.
VAROITUS: Noudata seuraavaa johdotusjärjestystä kytkiessäsi virtaa:
maasta maahan, positiivinen johdin +RTN-napaan ja negatiivinen johdin
-48 V -napaan. Tee edellinen käänteisessä järjestyksessä, kun olet
katkaisemassa virtaa. Maajohto tulisi aina kytkeä ensimmäisenä kiinni ja
viimeisenä pois.
ATTENTION: Lorsque vous vous connectez au secteur, suivez les
instructions suivantes : terre à la terre, câble positif vers connexion +RTN et
câble négatif vers connexion –48V. Suivez ces instructions dans l'ordre
inverse pour vous déconnecter du secteur. Le câble à la terre doit toujours
être connecté en premier et déconnecté en dernier.
WARNUNG: Beachten Sie beim Anschluss an das Stromnetz folgende
Reihenfolge der Verkabelung: Masseleiter an Masseanschluss, positiver Pol
an +RTN-Anschluss und negativer Pol an -48 V-Anschluss. Verwenden Sie
bei der Unterbrechung der Stromversorgung die umgekehrte Reihenfolge.
Der Masseleiter sollte immer zuerst angeschlossen und zuletzt entfernt
werden.

AVVERTENZA: Quando si collega il router alla presa di alimentazione,
seguire la sequenza di fili elettrici indicata di seguito: terra a terra, polo
positivo sul terminale +RTN e polo negativo sul terminale -48 V. Per
scollegare il router dalla presa di alimentazione, seguire la sequenza
nell'ordine inverso. Il filo della terra deve essere sempre collegato per primo
e scollegato per ultimo.
AVISO: Ao ligar a corrente eléctrica, observar a seguinte sequência de
cablagem: fio de terra a fio de terra, pólo positivo com terminal +RTN, e
pólo negativo com terminal -48 V. Para desligar a corrente, executar a
sequência em ordem inversa. O fio de terra deve ser sempre ligado em
primeiro lugar e desligado em último lugar.
ADVERTENCIA: Cuando conecte la alimentación, siga la secuencia de
cableado que se indica a continuación: tierra a tierra, toma positiva a
terminal +RTN, y toma negativa a terminal -48 V. Para desconectar la
alimentación, realice la secuencia en orden inverso. La toma de tierra
siempre deberá conectarse en primer lugar y desconectarse en último.
VARNING: När du ansluter strömmen ska du följa denna sekvens: jord till
jord, positiv sladd till +RTN-terminalen och negativ sladd till -48
V-terminalen. Utför dessa steg i motsatt ordning när du kopplar från
strömmen. Jordsladden bör alltid kopplas in först och kopplas ur sist.

WARNING: Ensure the DC input wiring is connected in the correct
polarity, as reversed polarity may trip the circuit breaker or damage the
Equipment.
ADVARSEL: Kontrollér, at jævnstrømstilførselsledningen er tilsluttet
med korrekt polaritet, da omvendt polaritet kan udløse brydekontakten
eller beskadige udstyr.
WAARSCHUWING: Controleer of de ingangsbedrading voor
gelijkstroom is aangesloten op de juiste polariteit, aangezien omgekeerde
polariteit de stroomonderbreker kan uitschakelen of de apparatuur kan
beschadigen.
VAROITUS: Varmista, että tasavirran syöttöjohdotus on kytketty
oikeisiin napoihin, sillä vastakkainen napaisuus saattaa suojalaukaista
katkaisijan (tripata) tai aiheuttaa vahinkoa laitteella.
ATTENTION: Assurez-vous que le câble de l'entrée de courant continu
se trouve dans la bonne polarité, sinon vous risquez de déclencher le
disjoncteur ou d'endommager l'équipements.
WARNUNG: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Gleichstromkabel an die
richtige Polarität angeschlossen ist. Andernfalls kann der Trennschalter
ausgeschaltet oder der Ausrüstung beschädigt werden.
AVVERTENZA: Assicurarsi che i fili CC siano collegati alla polarità
corretta, in caso contrario può scattare l'interruttore automatico o si può
danneggiare il apparecchiature.
AVISO: Certifique-se de que a ligação de entrada de corrente é feita com
a polaridade adequada, pois a polaridade invertida pode fazer com que o
circuito dispare ou danificar o equipamento.
ADVERTENCIA: Asegúrese de que el cable de entrada de CC está
conectado con la polaridad adecuada ya que la polaridad contraria podría
provocar un cortacircuitos o dañar el equipo.
VARNING: Kontrollera att ingångssladdarna för likström är anslutna till
rätt pol. Fel pol kan leda till att strömbrytaren stängs av eller att
utrustning skadas.

WARNING: When stranded wiring is used, make sure that no “stray”
strands protrude from the DC power entry terminals.
ADVARSEL: Når der bruges flertrådede ledninger, skal det kontrolleres,
at der ikke stikker tråde ud af stikkene.
WAARSCHUWING: Wanneer er geslagen bedrading wordt gebruikt,
moet u ervoor zorgen dat er geen ‘lekdraden’ uit de
gelijkstroomingangsklemmen steken.
VAROITUS: Jos käytetään johdotusta, jossa on säikeitä, varmista, ettei
yksikään säie harota tasavirran syöttönavoista.
ATTENTION: Lorsque vous utilisez des câbles toronnés, assurez-vous
qu'aucun brin ne dépasse des entrées de courant continu.
WARNUNG: Achten Sie bei verseilten Kabeln darauf, dass keine Litzen
aus den Gleichstromanschlüssen hervorstehen.
AVVERTENZA: Se si utilizzano cavi a connettori multipli, assicurarsi
che nessun cavo sporga dai terminali dell'alimentazione CC.
AVISO: Quando for utilizado fio entrançado, certifique-se que não ficam
pontas soltas aparentes nos terminais de entrada de energia de CC.
ADVERTENCIA: Si se utiliza cable trenzado, asegúrese de que no se ha
salido ningún hilo de los terminales de entrada de CC.
VARNING: Om du använder tvinnade kablar ska du kontrollera att inga
lösa filament sticker ut från ingångsterminalerna för likström.
WARNING: Before working on the Equipment or near the power entries,

ensure that the power cables have been disconnected from both DC power
entry terminals. Do not touch the DC power entries while the power
cables are connected. Voltages may be present within the power entries
when the power is switched off and the power cables are connected.
ADVARSEL: Før der arbejdes på udstyr eller nær strømindgangene, skal
det kontrolleres, at ledningerne er taget ud af begge strømtilførsler. Rør
ikke ved strømtilførslerne, mens ledningerne er tilsluttet. Der kan være
spænding i strømtilførslerne, når der er slukket for strømmen, og
strømledningerne er tilsluttet.
WAARSCHUWING: Controleer of de stroomkabels zijn afgekoppeld van
beide gelijkstroomingangen, voordat u aan de apparatuur of in de buurt
van de stroomingangen gaat werken. Raak de gelijkstroomingangen niet
aan terwijl de stroomkabels worden aangesloten. De stroomingangen
kunnen onder spanning staan wanneer de stroom wordt uitgeschakeld en
de stroomkabels worden aangesloten.
VAROITUS: Ennen laitteella tai sen virtalähteiden lähellä työskentelyä
varmista, että virtakaapelit on irrotettu molemmista tasavirran
syöttönavoista. Älä koske tasavirran syöttökohtiin kun virtakaapelit on
kytketty kiinni. Virransyöttökohdissa saattaa olla vielä jännitettä silloin,
kun virta on kytketty pois ja virtakaapelit ovat kiinni.

ATTENTION: Avant de travailler sur l'équipements ou près de ses
entrées électriques, assurez-vous que les câbles d'alimentation sont
déconnectés des deux entrées de courant continu. Ne touchez pas les
entrées de courant continu lorsque les câbles d'alimentation sont
connectés. Il risque d'y avoir encore du courant dans les entrées
d'alimentation lorsque l'interrupteur est éteint et que les câbles sont
connectés.
WARNUNG: Entfernen Sie vor allen Arbeiten am Ausrüstung oder nahe
der Stromanschlüsse die Stromkabel aus beiden Gleichstromanschlüssen.
Berühren Sie die Gleichstromeingänge nicht, wenn die Stromkabel
angeschlossen sind. An den Stromeingängen können Spannungen
anliegen, wenn die Stromzufuhr unterbrochen ist und die Stromkabel
angeschlossen sind.
AVVERTENZA: Prima di eseguire interventi sul apparecchiature o di
avvicinarsi agli ingressi della corrente, assicurarsi che i cavi
dell'alimentazione siano stati scollegati da entrambi i terminali
dell'alimentazione CC. Non avvicinarsi agli ingressi dell'alimentazione
CC mentre i cavi dell'alimentazione sono collegati. È possibile che la
tensione sia presente negli ingressi quando l'alimentazione è scollegata
ma i cavi sono collegati.
AVISO: Antes de iniciar o trabalho com o equipamento que estiver ligado
à corrente eléctrica, retire qualquer tipo de artigos de joalharia (tais como
anéis, colares e relógios). Quando estão ligados à corrente e à terra, os
objectos em metal podem aquecer e provocar graves queimaduras ou até
mesmo ficar soldados aos terminais de corrente.
ADVERTENCIA: Antes de trabajar en el equipo o cerca de las entradas
de alimentación, compruebe que los cables de alimentación están
desconectados de los dos terminales de entrada de CC. No toque las
entradas de CC mientras que los cables de alimentación estén conectados.
Es posible que haya corriente en las entradas de alimentación cuando el
equipo esté apagado y los cables de alimentación estén conectados.
VARNING: Innan du arbetar med utrustning eller i närheten av
strömingångarna ska du kontrollera att nätsladdarna har kopplats ur från
båda ingångsterminalerna för likström. Rör inte ingångsterminalerna för
likström när nätsladdarna är inkopplade. Det kan finnas ström kvar i
strömingångarna när strömmen är av och nätsladdarna är inkopplade.

Electric Safety Warning
WARNING: Do not touch uninsulated wiring or ports when they have

not been disconnected from a power source, as doing so may result in
electrical shock.
ADVARSEL: Rør ikke ved uisolerede ledninger eller porte, når de ikke
er koblet fra strømkilden, da det kan medføre elektrisk stød.
WAARSCHUWING: Raak geen ongeïsoleerde bedrading of poorten
aan wanneer deze niet zijn afgekoppeld van de voeding, aangezien dit
een elektrische schok kan veroorzaken.
VAROITUS: Älä koske eristämättömiin johtoihin tai napoihin, jos ne
ovat kytköksissä virtalähteeseen, sillä tästä voi seurata sähköisku.
ATTENTION: Ne touchez pas les câbles ou ports non isolés lorsqu'ils
ne sont pas déconnectés du secteur, car vous risquez de vous
électrocuter.
WARNUNG: Berühren Sie keine unisolierten Kabel oder Anschlüsse,
wenn sie noch an eine Stromquelle angeschlossen sind, da dies zu
einem Stromschlag führen könnte.
AVVERTENZA: Evitare di toccare i cavi o le porte non isolate quando
sono ancora collegati alla presa di alimentazione, poiché si potrebbero
verificare scosse elettriche.
AVISO: Não tocar na cablagem aparente ou nas portas de entrada de
corrente que não tiverem sido desligadas da fonte de energia, pois desse
facto podem resultar choques eléctricos.
ADVERTENCIA: No toque los puertos ni los cables que no estén
aislados si no están desconectados de la fuente de alimentación ya que
podría provocar una descarga eléctrica.
VARNING: Rör inte sladdar eller portar som inte är isolerade om de
inte har kopplats ur från strömkällan. Det kan leda till elektriska stötar.

UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and
Requirements
This section outlines the UL/TUV statutory warnings and requirements
applicable to ADR-10000 platforms.
Identification of TUV CE Listing

ADR-10000 shelves are TUV CE-listed. The following is a typical TUV CE
label for ADR-10000 shelves.
Figure 1-3: ADR-10000 TUV CE label
Warning Label
The following warning label is affixed alongside the ADR power input
connectors and the xRAP circuit breakers.
Figure 1-4: Power input warning label
CAUTION: ADR Equipment has two power sources.

Disconnect both power sources before servicing.

UL/TUV Overcurrent Protection
Requirements
NOTE: Rating and type of overcurrent protection are

according to Classification Level 5 (L5) for power supplies
having output circuits that meet the requirements for SELV
circuits.
WARNING: When replacing circuit breakers, observe the

following precautions:
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only
with a circuit breaker of the same type and rating.
Disconnect power before changing a circuit breaker.
ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromettre la protection
contre les risques d’incendie, remplacer par un fusible de
même type et de mêmes caractéristiques nominales.
UL/TUV Equipment Grounding Requirements
CAUTION: The Equipment must have a connection between

the grounded conductor of the DC power supply circuit and
the Equipment grounding conductor.
Connect the Equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode

conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to
which the DC supply system grounding electrode is connected.
Locate the Equipment in the same immediate area (for example, in adjacent
racks) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounding
conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and also
the point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system must not be grounded
elsewhere.
Position the DC supply source in the same premises as this Equipment.
There must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit
conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding
electrode conductor.

UL/TUV Requirements for Grounded
Conductors
Connect the Equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode
conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to
which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor is connected.
Locate the DC supply source within the same premises as the Equipment. There
must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit
conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding
electrode conductor.
ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory
Warnings and Requirements
This section outlines the ITU-T and Telcordia statutory warnings and
requirements applicable to ADR platforms. The source for these requirements
can be found in IEC 60950-1/3.2.1.2.
DC Supply Circuit Connection to the

Grounding Conductor
WARNING: The Equipment must have a connection between the

grounded conductor of the DC power supply circuit and the Equipment
grounding conductor. See installation instructions for more details.
When this connection is made, all the following conditions must be met:
This Equipment shall be connected directly to the DC supply system
grounding electrode conductor, or to a bonding jumper from a
grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system
grounding electrode is connected.
This Equipment shall be located in the same immediate area (such as
adjacent cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection
between the grounded conductor of the same DC supply circuit and
the grounding conductor, as well as the point of grounding of the DC
system. The DC system shall not be grounded elsewhere.
The DC supply source shall be located within the same premises as
this Equipment.
There shall be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded
circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection
of the grounding electrode conductor.

WARNING: Cet appareil est conçu pour permettre le raccordement du
conducteur relié à la terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. au conducteur de
terre de l’appareil.
Pour ce raccordement, toutes les conditions suivantes doivent être
respectées:
Ce matériel doit être raccordé directement au conducteur de la prise de
terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. ou à une tresse de mise à la masse
reliée à une barre omnibus de terre laquelle est raccordée à l’électrode
de terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c.
Les appareils dont les conducteurs de terre respectifs sont raccordés au
conducteur de terre du même circuit d’alimentation c.c. doivent être
installés à proximité les uns des autres (p.ex., dans des armoires
adjacentes) et à proximité de la prise de terre du circuit d’alimentation
c.c. Le circuit d’alimentation c.c. ne doit comporter aucune autre prise
de terre.
La source d’alimentation du circuit c.c. doit être située dans la même
pièce que le matériel.
Il ne doit y avoir aucun dispositif de commutation ou de
sectionnement entre le point de raccordement au conducteur de la
source d’alimentation c.c. et le point de raccordement à la prise de
terre.
Ethernet Port Precautions
WARNINGS:
Ethernet ports must be cabled with shielded cables and the shield
grounded at both ends.
Intra-building ports of the Equipment or subassembly are suitable
for connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only.
Intra-building ports of the Equipment or subassembly MUST NOT
be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its
wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building
interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed
OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP
wiring.

Laser Safety Requirements
Laser Classification
SAGEMCOM Equipment and components equipped with laser devices
described in this manual comply with the International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards, including IEC 60825-1 and
IEC 60825-2 - Safety of Laser Products.
Except for certain high power optical amplifiers, ADR Equipment is classified
as Class 1 laser products. The product and its accessories do not emit hazardous
light and the beam is totally enclosed during normal operating modes of
customer operation. As long as the Equipment is operated in accordance with
the applicable safety instructions, the Hazard Level in Equipment access
locations is inherently Class 1M or lower.
The high power optical amplifiers are also classified as Class 1M (or lower)
laser products. Note that the high power optical amplifiers emit power within
Hazard Level 3B and Hazard Level 4, even though they are classified as Class
1 or Class 1M. Hazard level might be higher than the product class, depending
on network implementation and fiber accessibility.
SAGEMCOM provides product and installation information in order that the
products may be installed and serviced safely.
Laser Information
See the ADR System Specification for information regarding the laser
transmitters of the various optical cards available for the ADR platforms.
Warning Labels for Laser Products

The following labels are affixed to
optical cards and modules near the
optical connectors to indicate that the
product is classified as a Class 1 laser
product.
The following labels are affixed to

optical cards and modules with a laser
near the optical connectors to indicate
that the product is classified as a Class
1M laser product.

Laser Safety Statutory Warning
All personnel involved in Equipment installation, operation, and maintenance
must be aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective
devices generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly
observe the applicable safety precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring
into optical connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.
Remember that observing safety precautions is not a matter of personal choice:
ignoring safety puts all the people within line of sight in danger!
Training for Laser Safety

Personnel must be trained for safety before being authorized to operate, install,
and/or maintain laser products. The IEC 60825 standards require organizations
to appoint a laser safety officer who is responsible for training personnel,
establishing safe operational procedures, and supervising the implementation of
these procedures during routine work.
Untrained personnel must not be allowed to operate, install, and/or maintain
laser products.

Laser Device Operating Precautions
In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to
observe the following warnings when operating a product equipped with a laser
device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in bodily injury and
damage to equipment.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

During maintenance and other activities performed on equipment
using lasers, protection goggles with nominal OD2 for the wavelength
range of 1300 nm to 1600 nm are recommended. Protection goggles
are mandatory for tasks performed on equipment with up to 30 dBm
optical power lasers.
Hot insertion or swapping of a optical interface module should be
carried out only by authorized personnel.
During hot removal and insertion of a fiber termination, avoid looking
into the fiber to prevent irremediable damage to your eyes.
Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber terminations that
are not currently in use.
Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures
associated with the laser device other than those specified herein.
Allow only SAGEMCOM authorized service technicians to repair the
unit.
To avoid potential fiber fusing, burnt connectors, or loss of laser
power, ensure all high power connections are clean before you power
up the optical amplifier.
It is strictly forbidden to override any protective devices and interlocks
used to prevent direct exposure to the laser beam.

WARNING: Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of
optical ports when no fiber cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not
stare into open apertures.
ADVARSEL: Der kan forekomme usynlige laserstråler fra de optiske
portes åbninger, når der ikke er tilsluttet et lyslederkabel. Undgå at blive
udsat for disse stråler, og kig ikke ind i åbninger.
WAARSCHUWING: Er kan onzichtbare laserstraling uit de opening van
de optische poorten komen wanneer er geen fiberkabel is aangesloten.
Vermijd blootstelling aan straling en kijk niet in de openingen.
VAROITUS: Optisten porttien aukoista saattaa säteillä näkymätöntä
lasersäteilyä silloin, kun niissä ei ole kuitukaapeleita kiinni. Vältä
altistumista ja älä tuijota näihin avoimiin aukkoihin.
ATTENTION: Un rayonnement laser invisible peut être émis à partir de
l'ouverture des ports optiques lorsqu’aucun câble à fibres optiques n'est
connecté. Évitez de vous y exposer et ne fixez pas les ouvertures.
WARNUNG: Wenn kein Faserkabel angeschlossen ist, können aus der
Öffnung der optischen Anschlüsse Laserstrahlen austreten. Vermeiden
Sie Bestrahlungen und schauen Sie nicht in diese Öffnungen.
AVVERTENZA: Le aperture delle porte ottiche possono emettere
radiazioni laser invisibili quando i cavi in fibra non sono collegati. Evitare
lunghe esposizioni davanti alle aperture.
AVISO: Podem ser emitidas radiações invisíveis de laser a partir das
aberturas das portas ópticas se não estiver ligado qualquer cabo de fibra
óptica. Evitar a exposição e não olhar directamente pelas aberturas
aparentes.
ADVERTENCIA: Es posible que la radiación láser invisible se emita
desde la apertura de puertos ópticos cuando no haya ningún cable de fibra
conectado. Evite la exposición y no mire fijamente a las aberturas.
VARNING: Osynlig laserstrålning kan spridas från öppningen på optiska
portar om ingen fiberoptikkabel är ansluten. Undvik exponering och stirra
inte in i öppningarna.

Protection against Electrostatic
Discharge
This section provides guidelines regarding the protection of ADR Equipment
and its components against damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD) during
handling, packaging/unpackaging, transportation, installation, commissioning,
inspection, servicing, and maintenance works.
Electronic equipment, assemblies, and components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge or include sensitive items are identified by the basic
ESD warning symbol shown in the following figure.
Figure 1-5: Basic ESD warning symbol
The information in this section presents generally accepted workmanship

practices and procedures that, when properly applied, minimize the probability
of electrostatic damage to ADR Equipment and its components.
The information is also in line with CENELEC Electronic Components
Committee (CECC) specification CECC 00 015 that deals with protection of
devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESDS).
General
Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be
damaged by electrostatic discharges. An electrostatic discharge between two
objects occurs when an object carrying static electrical charges touches, or is
brought near enough to the other object.
Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of
insulating materials or separation of two such surfaces, and may also be
induced by electrical fields. Routine activities such as walking across an
insulating floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and
so on, can easily build charges up to levels that may cause damage, especially
when humidity is low.
In many cases, the build-up of charges can be avoided by using special
materials, for example, garments and packaging made of antistatic materials or
materials that have high resistivity but are not insulators.

The best approach to avoiding damage by ESD includes a combination of
means and procedures that achieves the following goals:
| Avoid build-up of electrostatic charges
| Create a protected work environment that helps prevent ESD
| Provide means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic
charges when entering the protected work environment
NOTE: An area in which ESDS can be handled with

minimum risk of damage as a result of electrostatic discharge
or fields, and in which the operator is not exposed to
additional risks, is called an ESD Protected Area (EPA).
Personnel Training
During production and assembly, Equipment is handled in work spaces
especially prepared and certified to serve as a permanent EPA. However, in
many cases, the environment in which the same Equipment is installed or
maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled
boundary.
Therefore, all the work requiring the handling of unprotected ESDS must be
considered as field work.
Field work in this context includes such activities as service and maintenance,
installation, site inspection, and commissioning of components and assemblies
classified as ESDS, together with the packaging and unpackaging activities
associated with such activities.
All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform field work in the
same way as work performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material
quality and personal responsibilities, training, labeling, and packaging.
Use of Temporary EPA

Where necessary, a temporary EPA must be used. A typical temporary EPA
arrangement suitable for field work on ADR-10000 equipment is shown in the
following figure. The EPA tool kit includes:
| Wrist strap with 1 M Ω series resistor
| Bonding strap with 1 M Ω series resistor
| ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum
The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or
flooring capable of providing protection against ESD.

CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a
way that ensures electrical bonding of all the materials used,
and prevents the occurrence of any sudden changes in
potential within the EPA that could cause unacceptable
voltages or discharges to be applied to ESDs.
ADR-10000 with TPU
ADR-10000 with TPU
Figure 1-6: ADR-10000 typical temporary EPA arrangement

Work Arrangements within a Temporary EPA
To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following
arrangements must be observed by persons entering and/or performing field
work within a temporary EPA area:
| All operators working within a temporary EPA area must wear, as a
minimum, an antistatic protecting garment made of cotton.
| If the extent of the temporary work area is such that the operator needs to
walk and move within that area, then the floor must be capable of providing
protection against ESD.
| The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling an
ESDS.
| If it becomes necessary to remove an ESDS from Equipment and transfer it
to a temporary work surface away from the Equipment, the ESDS must be
given protective packaging unless equipotential bonding of the operator to
ground is maintained.
| An ESDS must be placed directly into protective packaging upon removal
from equipment. A replacement ESDS must be kept in its protective
packing until required for immediate installation in the equipment.
| The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools necessary
to maintain and control the temporary EPA are available at the place of the
field work at service time.
| All tools intended for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be so
constructed that they do not generate or hold an induced electrostatic
charge.
Environmental and Health

Concerns
SAGEMCOM is committed to achieving high standards of environmental
quality and product safety.
The International Standardization Organization (ISO) has developed the
internationally recognized standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14001. These are
quality management standards developed by ISO and administered by
independent accreditation and certification bodies.
ISO 9000 is a family of standards for quality management systems. ISO 9000
has been accepted as a model when assessing the adequacy of quality
management systems. Some of the requirements in ISO 9001 (which is one of
the standards in the ISO 9000 family) include:
| Procedures that cover all key business processes
| Process monitoring to ensure effectiveness
| Adequate record keeping

| Monitoring output for defects, with appropriate and corrective action where
necessary
| Regular review of individual processes and the complete quality system as
a whole
| Facilitating continual improvement
ISO 14000 is the international specification for an Environmental Management
System (EMS). It specifies requirements for establishing an environmental
policy, determining environmental aspects and impacts of products, activities,
and services, planning environmental objectives and measurable targets,
implementation and operation of programs to meet objectives and targets,
checking and corrective action, and management review. SAGEMCOM Quality
and Environmental Management Systems were certified to these ISO standards
and are periodically audited by third-party organizations.
As a part of SAGEMCOM’s environmental commitment and in pursuit of

compliance with applicable environmental legislation, SAGEMCOM makes
every effort to ensure that its products supplied to the EU market are compliant
with the RoHS Europe directive restricting use of certain hazardous substances
in electrical and electronic equipment. SAGEMCOM also requires RoHS
compliance from all its suppliers. All new electrical and electronic equipment
delivered to locations within the EU do not contain any cadmium (Cd), lead
(Pb), hexavalent chromium compounds (Cr6+), mercury (Hg), polybrominated
biphenyls (PBB), or polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE), subject to certain
exemptions and limitations as outlined in the RoHS directive.
Without limiting the generality of the preceding statement, we wish to stress
that use of lead in solders in network infrastructure Equipment has been
exempted by the RoHS directive and may be found in certain SAGEMCOM
products.

All Equipment delivered to locations within the EU complies with the
requirements of the RoHS Europe directive. Similarly, SAGEMCOM
Equipment is compliant with the RoHS California directive and RoHS Chinese
directive where relevant. All SAGEMCOM Equipment included in the
Electronic Information Products (EIP) category includes a table of Toxic and
Hazardous Substances and Elements, verifying hazardous substance levels in
accordance with the RoHS China directive. Equipment documentation includes
the appropriate Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) lifespan symbol
indicating the point in time when the equipment may be expected to enter the
recycling system. Examples of these pollution control symbols are illustrated in
the following figure.
Figure 1-7: Pollution control logos
NOTE: The number in Logo 2 is for illustrative purposes

only. When in actual use, the number that appears indicates
the corresponding environmental protection use period of the
product.
SAGEMCOM adheres to the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE) directive requiring that all new products placed on the EU market be
labeled with the crossed-out wheeled bin recycling symbol defined by
CENELEC standard EN 50419 and accepted by the Member States. Note that
specific WEEE procedures may differ from Member State to Member State,
depending on the local implementation of the WEEE requirements.
Figure 1-8: WEEE recycling symbol

Do not dispose of SAGEMCOM Equipment and accessories together with
standard household waste. Please check with SAGEMCOM technical support
for more information about product disposal, including recycling and reuse. For
more information about SAGEMCOM's environmental, health, and safety
policy, see the quality policy pages on the SAGEMCOM website.
(Environmental, Health, and Safety Policy )
For any further information regarding SAGEMCOM's environmental and safety
policies, please contact technical support.

WARNING: The ultimate disposal of this product should be handled
according to national laws and regulations.
ADVARSEL: Endelig bortskaffelse af dette produkt skal ske i
overensstemmelse med nationale love og regler.
WAARSCHUWING: Dit product dient overeenkomstig de nationale
wetgeving en voorschriften te worden weggegooid.
VAROITUS: Tämän tuotteen lopullinen hävittäminen tulee tehdä
kansallisten lakien ja asetusten mukaisesti.
ATTENTION: La mise au rebut de ce produit devrait se faire
conformément aux lois et réglementations de chaque pays.
WARNUNG: Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt entsprechend den geltenden
Gesetzen und Vorschriften.
AVVERTENZA: L'utilizzo di questo prodotto deve essere conforme alle
leggi e alle normative nazionali.
AVISO: A destruição final deste produto deve ser feita de acordo com as
leis e regulamentos nacionais.
ADVERTENCIA: Este producto debe utilizarse de acuerdo a las normas y
leyes nacionales.
VARNING: Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör hanteras enligt
nationella lagar och riktlinjer.

2
Introduction
In this chapter:
ADR-10000 Platform Overview ......................................................................2-1
ADR-10000 I/O Protection Options ................................................................2-2
ADR-10000 Shelf with CWDM Networking Capabilities ..............................2-6
ADR-10000 Platform Overview

SAGEMCOM's ADR-10000 is a powerful flexible MSPP optimized for metro
networks. It supports multitude technologies in a cost-effective fashion to
address the market increasing traffic demands.
The ADR-10000 supports scalable STM-1/4/16/64/OTN aggregates and
flexible access topologies. It offers a wide range of features and benefits
including:
| Carrier class Ethernet as well as traditional SDH voice-centric services.
| Gradual in-service capacity expansion based on service provisioning needs.
An optical connection operating at a specific STM rate can be upgraded
from STM-1 to STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 without affecting traffic.
| Sublambda grooming resulting in high utilization of existing fibers and top
efficiency in transmission of different types of services.
| Support of optical cards and modules used to process, amplify, and monitor
multichannel signals.
The ADR-10000 shelf was designed to facilitate simple installation and
maintenance. Hot insertion of cards and modules is allowed, supporting quick
maintenance and repair without affecting traffic.

Figure 2-1: ADR-10000 shelf
ADR-10000 I/O Protection

Options
The ADR-10000 shelf boasts an extremely high modular design with two
module cages, one in the upper part, one in the lower part, and a card cage in
the middle. An expansion TPU shelf that adds protection capabilities to the I/O
modules, can be mounted on top and under the shelf. An expansion OCU shelf
that adds CWDM networking capabilities to the ADR-10000, can be mounted
on top of the upper TPU or directly on top of the ADR-10000 shelf.
Protection of I/O modules in the upper and lower module cages is supported.
CAUTION: When the ADR-10000 shelf is to be installed

vertically, pay attention to position the shelf with the FCU300
facing downwards, to ensure proper air flow to the ADR-
10000.

Basic ADR-10000 Shelf
The basic ADR-10000 shelf is housed in a 246 mm (9.68 in.) deep, 443 mm
(17.44 in.) wide, and 350 mm (13.78 in.) high equipment cage. The shelf
consists of two module cages, one in the upper part, the second in the lower
part, and a card cage in the middle. Each module cage can house up to 8 I/O
modules, totaling 16 modules in the entire shelf. The card cage accommodates
two MXC300 cards (main and protection), an External Connection Unit
(ECU300 or ECU300_F), and two wide I/O cards. When I/O cards are not used
in the wide slots, they can be adapted to accommodate one SIM16_1 module
each, using a mechanical adapter.
I/O protection is not supported in this option.
The ADR-10000 shelf can be installed in a horizontal or vertical position.
Figure 2-2: Basic ADR-10000 shelf, horizontal installation

Figure 2-3: Basic ADR-10000 shelf, vertical Installation
Expanded ADR-10000 with I/O Protection

The following I/O protection options are supported for ADR-10000 shelves
installed in a horizontal position:
| A TPU mounted on top of the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the
upper module cage.
| A TPU attached under the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the
lower module cage.
| Two TPUs, one mounted on top of the basic shelf protecting the I/O
modules in the upper cage, and one attached under the shelf protecting the
I/O modules in the lower cage.
Each TPU adds only 75 mm (3 in.) to the height of the ADR-10000 shelf.
Each TPM is connected to both operating and protection I/O modules in the
shelf in a 1:1, 1:2, or 1:3 configuration. If a failure is detected in one of the
operating I/O modules, the active MXC via the TC module in the TPU switches
the traffic from the active I/O module to the protection module.

The following figures show several options for installing TPUs with the ADR-
10000 shelf.
Figure 2-4: ADR-10000 with one TPU on top of the shelf
Figure 2-5: ADR-10000 with two TPUs
Similar I/O protection options are supported for ADR-10000 shelves installed
in a vertical position.

ADR-10000 Shelf with CWDM
Networking Capabilities
An OCU can be mounted on top of the basic shelf or on top of a TPU installed
on the basic shelf to add CWDM networking capabilities to the platform. The
OCU can accept various CWDM modules. Each expansion shelf (TPU or
OCU) adds 75 mm (3 in.) to the height of the ADR-10000.
NOTE: The OCU is not supported for installation under the

ADR-10000 shelf.
A typical ADR-10000 shelf with an OCU (and two TPUs) is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 2-6: ADR-10000 with an OCU and two TPUs

3
Site Preparation and Rack
Installation
In this chapter:
Overview..........................................................................................................3-1
Tools and Test Equipment ...............................................................................3-4
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection.................................................3-5
ADR Rack Installation Options .......................................................................3-6
Preparing Cables and Fibers ............................................................................3-7
ADR-10000 Accessories................................................................................3-18
Equipment Installation...................................................................................3-28
Rack Installation ............................................................................................3-37
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks................................................................3-42
Overview
The following sections describe the conditions required for installing the
equipment at the site.
Site Preparation
Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking into consideration
the following issues:
| System environmental requirements
| Physical location of the ADR-10000 shelves
| Location of power sources
| Types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical, management, alarm
monitoring, and so on)
| Work and equipment safety requirements

Environmental Requirements
The following environmental conditions must be provided at the installation
site.
Parameter Compliance requirements
Electromagnetic interference FTZ 1TR9, EN 55022-2/2003, EN 50082-1/97
Temperature ETSI ETS 300-19-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1
Main Equipment Dimensions

Table 3-1: Equipment dimensions
Equipment type Height Width Depth Max. weight (kg)
(mm) (mm) (mm)
ADR-10000 350 443 246 8.2 (shelf only)
30 (fully populated)
TPU 75 443 246 5.5 (shelf only)
10 (fully populated)
ADR-10000 + 425 443 246 13.7 (shelves only)
TPU 40 (fully populated)
ADR-10000 + 500 443 246 21.9 (shelves only)
two TPUs 50 (fully populated)
ADR-10000 + 575 443 246 30.1 (shelves only)
two TPUs + 60 (fully populated)
OCU
xRAP-B 133 445 185 9.5
xRAP-D 133 445 185 9.5
xDDF-21 44.5 440 150 3
FST 44.5 440 240 5
ODF 44.5 440 240 8

ADR-10000
Figure 3-1: ADR-10000 horizontal installation space dimension
Physical Location
WARNING: ADR-10000 shelves are intended for installation

in restricted access areas only.
Choose the physical location of the ADR-10000 shelves, taking the following
aspects into consideration:

1. Equipment dimensions, as specified in the following table.
2. Required floor loading capability: 150 kg per rack for a typical 4-shelf
installation.
3. Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring, and
management cables, and optical fibers. To ensure convenient access to
cables and fibers, it is recommended to use overhead cable ladders
whenever possible, to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack.
When a network management station, for example EMS-ADR, is installed on
the site, consider the method of connection to the local network management
station and the maximum allowed distance.
Power Sources
ADR equipment must be powered only by DC sources in compliance with the
applicable sections of ETSI 300 132-2 and FTZ 19PFL1, and the SELV of EN
60950-1 requirements. The nominal supply voltage is -48 VDC (positive lead
grounded); the allowed supply voltage range is -40 VDC to -57.6 VDC. For
redundancy, two separate DC power sources should be available.
The power consumption of the ADR-10000 is:
| Typical: 800 W
| Maximum: 1100 W
NOTE: If the input power connected to one of the xINFs

exceeds -57.6 VDC, both xINFs are shut down and the shelf
is switched off.
Tools and Test Equipment

No special-purpose tools beyond a standard technician toolbox are required for
the installation of ADR-10000 shelves.
Since traffic cables can be prepared on site, suitable tool kits should also be
available. This includes tools for the assembly of coaxial cables (see the
following table) and tools for the preparation of optical patch cords.
Table 3-2: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools
No. Name Description
1 Stripper DIN 1.0/2.3
2 Center contact crimp tool (blue) DIN 1.0/2.3
3 Crimp tool, outer DIN 1.0/2.3
4 Cable stripper NCX1
5 Nipper (cutter for center contact) NCX1
6 Die for NCX1 NCX1

Cleaning Optical Connectors
When handling optical fibers, clean the optical connectors using the standard
cleaning kits recommended by the optical connector manufacturers.
Unpacking and Performing

Visual Inspection
Before you start:
Before unpacking, make a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes.
Evidence of damage should be reported immediately to the carrier, the project
manager, and your local SAGEMCOM representative.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices

Proper handling and grounding precautions required
ADR-10000 equipment contains components sensitive to
electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage,
strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection Against
Electrostatic Discharge. Keep parts and cards in their
antistatic packaging material until you are ready to install
them.
The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack is recommended when handling
cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection
to internal connectors.
You must unpack the equipment on a clean flat surface.
To unpack the equipment:

1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a
short knife so as not to damage the internal items, and open the top flaps.
2. Remove the items contained in the box and inspect each item for damage.
Check for loose parts or any visual damage to the rack, shelf, and auxiliary
equipment. Also check the integrity of all the connectors, leads, and cables.
NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors

until optical cables are connected to them.
3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be
present.

4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not
remove the modules/cards from their individual protective packages until
they can be inserted in the shelf.
5. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached to
each box. If damaged parts are detected or if any parts are missing, notify
the project manager and your local SAGEMCOM representative.
ADR Rack Installation Options

ADR platforms can be installed in the following rack types:
| SAGEMCOM's recommended enhanced ETSI optical racks (hereafter
referred to as the optical rack), or the improved ETSI racks (hereafter
referred to as ETSI A). These racks have been specially adapted by
SAGEMCOM and are tailored to meet platform requirements and simplify
platform installation and maintenance, including the following benefits:
Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient
maintenance of all rack cables, including:
Control cables
Power cables
Data cables (where relevant)
Two channels on the rack’s front rails for routing up to 400 (ETSI A) or
800 (optical rack) optical fibers.
Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension
floors and/or ceiling ladders.
Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see
Environmental Requirements).
Front door for left or right opening mounting.
| Standard ETSI racks (hereafter referred to as ETSI B).
| ISO 19 racks and standard US racks. These racks should be used only in
consultation with and when approved by SAGEMCOM's Mechanical
Department.
ADR racks options are summarized in the following table.
Table 3-3: Equipment rack data
Type Height Width Depth Available space
Optical 2200 mm 600 mm 300 mm 47U (2100 mm)
Rack
ETSI A 2200 mm 600 mm 300 mm 46U (2050 mm)
ETSI A 2600 mm 600 mm 300 mm 55U (2450 mm)
ETSI B 2200 mm 600 mm 300 mm 46U (2050 mm)
ETSI B 2600 mm 600 mm 300 mm 55U (2450 mm)
US 7 ft 23 in. 12 in. 44U
(2134 mm) (585 mm) (305 mm) (6.5 ft/1960 mm)

Type Height Width Depth Available space
US 7 ft 19 in. 12 in. 44U
(2134 mm) (483 mm) (305 mm) (6.5 ft/1960 mm)
ISO 19 7.25 ft 24 in. 24 in. 47U
(2200 mm) (600 mm) (600 mm) (6.85 ft/2089 mm)
The loading of a fully equipped rack is 7.35 kn/m2, or 55.35 kn/ft.2.
NOTES:
| Not all ADR platforms can be installed in all types of
racks. This section includes a general list of the rack
options available. The installation instructions for each
platform include a list of the racks appropriate for that
platform.
| The installation instructions in this manual are written on
the basis of an installation using an SAGEMCOM
enhanced rack. Some of these instructions may not be
relevant if you are using a standard rack supplied by other
vendors.
| Before any installation plan can be completed, a site
survey by SAGEMCOM technical support team is
required, to verify rack accessibility and accessory
compatibility at that site. If you are working with standard
racks from other vendors, the site survey is also essential to
determine what changes are required to adapt the rack to
ADR platform installation requirements.
SAGEMCOM ADR equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or

suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. Some of these
installation options are described in Installing Equipment Racks. If your facility
uses a different installation paradigm, contact the SAGEMCOM Technical
Support team for additional information.

Preparing Cables and Fibers
NOTE: This section provides information for preparing
cables and optical fibers. The necessary cables can also be
ordered from SAGEMCOM. For details, contact
SAGEMCOM’s Customer Support team or your
SAGEMCOM sales representative.
The main cables required for installing the ADR-10000 include:

| Grounding cables, described in Grounding Cables (on page 3-9)
| DC power cables, described in DC Power Cables (on page 3-11)
| Alarm cables, described in Alarm Cables (on page 3-12)
| Management cables, described in Management Cables (on page 3-13)
| Timing (clock) cables, described in Timing (Clock) Cables (on page 3-13)
| Electric traffic cables, described in Electric Traffic Cables (on page 3-13)
| Optical fibers, described in Optical Fibers (on page 3-15)
| Data cables for data modules, described in Data Cables for EISMBs,
DIOMs, and MCSMs (on page 3-16) as applicable
DC power and traffic cables should be prepared on site. AC power cables
suitable for connection to the power outlet types specified when placing the
order (according to the site specifications) and the control and alarm cables
used within ADR equipment racks, are included in the shipment with power
outlets provided according to the site specifications.
The following sections provide information to enable you to prepare cables on
site. Refer to Connector Pin Assignments (on page A-1) for a description of the
equipment connector types and cable wiring.
WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and

grounding cables, use only UL-listed components of the
specified types. Components must also comply with any
applicable national and local safety codes and regulations.
Only qualified trained personnel may be involved in the
preparation of the various cable types. Personnel must use
only approved procedures, in accordance with the applicable
workmanship practice.

Grounding Cables
Rack equipment is bonded through the screws that fasten the equipment chassis
to the frame of the rack. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a reliable
low-impedance connection between the rack frame and the site grounding bus
using copper conductors.
Equipment installed in racks is bonded through the screws used to fasten the
equipment chassis to the frame of the rack. Therefore, it is necessary to provide
a reliable low-impedance connection between the rack frame and the site
grounding bus using copper conductors.
Make the connection between the rack grounding screw and the site grounding
bar by means of a copper lead with green/yellow insulation having the same
diameter as the RAP input power cable or thicker, in compliance with UL/ETSI
recommendations.
The end of the lead connected to a RAP, as used in the rack, must be terminated
in an M8 lug.
Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route. Treat the bare
portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole
compression lug. If the lug is not plated, bring it to a bright finish and coat it
with antioxidant before connecting it to the frame of the rack.
WARNING: The ground cable must be of at least the same

thickness as the RAP power cable.

procedures described in Grounding the ADR-10000 Shelf
must be completed before, for example, connecting an
external PC to configure and initialize the NE management
system.

WARNING: This equipment is designed to permit the
connection of the grounded conductor of the DC supply circuit to
the grounding conductor at the equipment. See installation
instructions for more details.
When this connection is made, all of the following conditions
must be met:
This equipment shall be connected directly to the DC supply
system grounding electrode conductor, or to a bonding
jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC
supply system earthing electrode is connected.
This equipment shall be located in the same immediate area
(such as adjacent cabinets) as any other equipment that has a
connection between the grounded conductor of the same DC
supply circuit and the grounding conductor, as well as the
point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system shall
not be grounded elsewhere.
The DC supply source shall be located within the same
premises as this equipment.
There shall be no switching or disconnecting devices in the
grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the
point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.
WARNING: Cet appareil est conçu pour permettre le

raccordement du conducteur relié à la terre du circuit
d’alimentation c.c. au conducteur de terre de l’appareil.
Pour ce raccordement, toutes les conditions suivantes doivent
être respectées:
Ce matériel doit être raccordé directement au conducteur de
la prise de terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. ou à une tresse
de mise à la masse reliée à une barre omnibus de terre
laquelle est raccordée à l’électrode de terre du circuit
d’alimentation c.c.
Les appareils dont les conducteurs de terre respectifs sont
raccordés au conducteur de terre du même circuit
d’alimentation c.c. doivent être installés à proximité les uns
des autres (p.ex., dans des armoires adjacentes) et à proximité
de la prise de terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. Le circuit
d’alimentation c.c. ne doit comporter aucune autre prise de
terre.
La source d’alimentation du circuit c.c. doit être située dans
la même pièce que le matériel.
Il ne doit y avoir aucun dispositif de commutation ou de
sectionnement entre le point de raccordement au conducteur
de la source d’alimentation c.c. et le point de raccordement à
la prise de terre.

DC Power Cables
NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for

connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be
connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with
a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V)
should be connected with a blue cable, and the negative lead
(-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that
describe DC power cable connections, use cables with
appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area
of residence.
DC power cables should be prepared on site. Two types of DC power cables are
needed:
| RAP input power cables
| Shelf power cables
RAP input power cables

The RAP input power cables are prepared on site. They connect input power
from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input terminals of the
rack's RAP panel.
Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The
cables must use copper leads complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. Use
a red lead for the positive conductor and a black lead for the negative
conductor, or as required in your area of residence.
The RAP cable ends must be terminated in cable lugs matching the conductor
gauge with M8 lugs for all RAP types.
The recommended cable gauge is 0 AWG (50 mm2/.078 inch2) or thicker for the
xRAP-D, xRAP-B or xRAP-HP, and 2 AWG (35 mm2/.054 in.2). This gauge
ensures that the voltage drop across the rack power cable at full power
consumption does not exceed 2 V, even for cable runs up to 30 meters (99 feet)
connected to a RAP providing power to two ADR shelves.
When an xRAP is used to provide power to a single ADR shelf, lower lead
gauges may be used:
| For cable runs not exceeding 20 meters (66 feet), it is sufficient to use 16
mm2 (.025 inch2) copper leads.
| For cable runs not exceeding 30 meters (99 feet), it is sufficient to use 25
mm2 (.039 inch2) copper leads.

NOTE:
| If necessary, the gauge of the grounding lead can also be
reduced to the gauge of the power leads, that is, 16 mm2
(.025 in.2) for lengths up to 20 meters (66 feet), and
25 mm2 (.039 in.2) for lengths up to 30 meters (99 feet).
| The ground cable must be of at least the same thickness as
the xRAP power cable. Therefore, if the xRAP power
cable is thick, the grounding cable must match that
thickness.
| The thickness of the shelf grounding cable must match the
thickness of the power cable from the xRAP to the shelf.
Shelf power cables

Two 12 AWG (25 mm²) cables supplied by SAGEMCOM are used to connect
the two redundant input power sources from the RAP panel to the POWER
connectors on the MXC300-A and MXC300-B cards of each ADR-10000 shelf
installed in the rack.
Alarm Cables
Alarm cables used are included in the shipment according to the site
specifications. Alarm indications are carried by the following cables:
| Shelf alarm indication cable. One shelf alarm indication cable is required
for each ADR-10000 shelf installed in the rack. One end of the cable is
always connected to the ALARMS connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F
card. Connection of the other end depends on the cable type, as follows:
xRAP-B alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the
xRAP-B.
xRAP-D alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the
xRAP-D.
Client alarm cable. Connects to the client's alarm collecting facility.
| Bay alarm cable. One bay alarm cable is required for each rack. This cable
carries the alarm indications and monitoring lines of the bay (rack). One
end of the cable is connected to the RAP, the other end is open and
connects to the client's alarm collecting facility. Two types of this cable are
available:
xRAP-B bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARMS connector on the
xRAP-B.
xRAP-D bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARMS connector on the
xRAP-D.

Management Cables
Out-of-band management communication is connected to an ADR-10000 by
means of a minihub with a pair of the RJ-45 Ethernet connectors located on the
ECU300-F and ECU300 cards.
If one ADR-10000 is installed, the connection is made to the management
MAIN RJ-45 connector. If more than one ADR-10000 is installed in the same
site, it is possible to save the use of an external hub. In this case, the first
system is connected as explained above, and the other systems are connected in
an Ethernet daisy chain. The management MAIN connector of each system is
connected to the management PROT/LCT connector of the previous system.
Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources.
Cables of Category 3 or better must be used. The length of the cables must not
exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type and hub port in use (up
to a few dozen meters).
Timing (Clock) Cables

The ECU300/ECU300-F on the ADR-10000 shelf has two timing reference
connectors, T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2, which are used for 2.048 Mbps signals
and have balanced (120 Ω) G.703 interfaces.
The cables used to connect to these connectors are prepared on site, and they
comprise individually shielded twisted pairs (the same type of pairs needed for
connection to the balanced E1 tributary interfaces).
If the site timing reference distribution subsystem has unbalanced (75 Ω) G.703
interfaces, a 120 Ω/75 Ω adapter can be supplied for mounting on the
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors. This permits using coaxial cables
(BT3002 or equivalent) of the same type used for connecting to balanced E1
tributary interfaces.
Electric Traffic Cables

Some electric traffic cables can be prepared on site. The following table lists
the type of cables and mating connectors needed for each ADR-10000 traffic
interface type.
NOTE: The connectors are identical regardless of whether

the traffic cables are connected directly to the I/O modules or
to TPMs on the TPU.
Table 3-4: Traffic cables mating connector data

I/O module Interface Cable type Mating Qty/
type connector Module
PIM2_21 E1 balanced Twin multipair cable (2 x Twin 50-pin 1
(2.048 Mbps) 25 shielded 120 Ω twisted SCSI male

I/O module Interface Cable type Mating Qty/
type connector Module
pairs)
PIM2_42 E1 balanced Twin multipair cable (2 x 100-pin 2
(2.048 Mbps) 25 shielded 120 Ω twisted SCSI male
pairs)
PIM2_63/B E1 balanced Twin multipair cable (2 x Twin 50-pin 3
PIM2_63 (2.048 Mbps) 25 shielded 120 Ω twisted SCSI male
pairs)
PIM345_3 E3 and DS-3 NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 6
(34/45 Mbps) male
SIM1_4/E STM-1 NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 8
electrical male
SIM1_8 1 STM-1 NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 16
electrical low profile
male
When a TPU is used, additional patch traffic cables between PIMs and TPMs
are required, as described in the following table.
Table 3-5: Patch traffic cables connecting I/O modules to the TPU
TPM Interface Cable type Mating connector Qty/
type Module
TPM2_1 E1 balanced Twin multipair PIM: Twin 50-pin SCSI 1
(2.048 Mbps) cable (25 pairs female
of shielded TPM: 100-pin SCSI
120 Ω twisted female
pairs)
TPM2_3 E1 balanced Twin multipair PIM: Twin 50-pin SCSI 4
(2.048 Mbps) cable (25 pairs female
of shielded TPM: 100-pin SCSI
120 Ω twisted female
pairs)
TPM2_42_2 E1 balanced Twin multipair PIM2_42: 100-pin SCSI 2
(2.048 Mbps) cable (25 pairs male
of shielded 120 TPM: Twin 136-pin
Ω twisted VHDCI male
pairs)
TPM2_63_2 E1 balanced Triple multipair PIM2_63: Triple twins 1
(2.048 Mbps) cable (25 pairs of 50-pin SCSI male
of shielded TPM: Twin 136-pin
120 Ω twisted VHDCI male
pairs)
E1 balanced Twin multipair PIM2_42: 100-pin SCSI 1
(2.048 Mbps) cable (25 pairs male
of shielded 120 TPM: Twin 136-pin
Ω twisted VHDCI male
pairs)
1
SIM1_8 configured as STM-1 electrical module with ETR-1 electrical SFP transceivers.

TPM Interface Cable type Mating connector Qty/
type Module
TPMH_1 E3 and DS-3 RG179x8 PIM: DIN1.0/2.3 male 2
(34/45 Mbps) multicoaxial TPM: 8W8 D-type
STM-1 cable
electrical
Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be prepared on site.
Use only 2 mm optical fibers to connect to optical interfaces. For each optical
interface, SAGEMCOM supplies patch cords with mating optical connectors
already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical termination on the
ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed on site.
The optical fibers should enter the rack from the top, be threaded through cable
guides running along the rack side rails, and end at the FST. The tray must
contain enough fiber length for extracting modules from the ADR-10000 and
for replacing fiber in case of damage (splicing repairs). When routing fibers,
make sure to observe the minimum bending radius (35 mm).
The following table lists the type of fibers and mating connectors needed to
prepare fibers for each ADR-10000 module/card.
Table 3-6: Optical fibers and mating connector data
I/O Interface type Fiber type Mating Qty/
module/card connector Module/Card
SIM1_4/OB STM-1 optical 1 pair of fiber LC male 8 fibers
SIM1_4/O patch cords per
interface
SIM1_8 2 STM-1 optical 1 pair of fiber LC male 16 fibers
patch cords per
interface
SIM4_2 STM-4 optical 1 pair of fiber LC male 4 fibers
patch cords per
interface
SIM4_4 STM-4 optical 1 pair of fiber LC male 8 fibers
patch cords per
interface
SIM16_1 STM-16 1 pair of fiber LC male 2 fibers
patch cords per
interface
SIM16_4 STM-16 1 pair of fiber LC male 8 fibers
patch cords per
interface
SIM64_XFP STM-64 1 pair of fiber LC male 2 fibers
patch cords per
interface
2
SIM1_8 configured as STM-1 optical module with OTR-1 optical SFP transceivers.

Data Cables for EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs
Data modules like EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs are connected by electrical
cables or optical fibers according to the interface type being connected.
Ethernet electrical interfaces are connected by CAT5E SFTP 4-pair cables
terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
Table 3-7: EISM optical fibers and mating connector data
EISMB Port Interface Fiber type Mating Qty/
module no. type connector module
EISMB_840 1-2 GbE/FE 1 pair of 50/62.5 LC male 8 fibers
µm MM fiber, or 1
pair of 9 µm SM
fiber patch cords
per interface for
GbE
1 pair of 50/62.5
µm MM fiber
patch cords per
interface for FE
3-4 FE 1 pair of 50/62.5 LC male
µm MM fiber
patch cords per
interface
EISMB_840 can also be equipped as a mixed module including optical and

electrical interfaces by inserting an electrical SFP in the port. The cabling to
such port is made as a connection to an electrical interface listed in the
following table.
The following table lists the type of Ethernet electrical traffic cables and the
mating connectors needed for the EISMB_804 module.
Table 3-8: EISMB Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data
EISMB Port Interface type Cable type Mating Qty/
module no. connector module
EISMB_80 1-2 10/100/1000BaseT CAT5E RJ-45 2
4 SFTP 4-pair
3-4 10/100BaseT CAT5E RJ-45 2
SFTP 4-pair
Table 3-9: DIOM optical fibers and mating connector data
DIOM Port Interface type Fiber type Mating Qty/
DIOM_40 1-4 GbE/FE 1 pair of LC male 8 fibers
50/62.5 µm
MM fiber, or 1
pair of 9 µm
SM fiber patch
cords per
interface for
GbE

1 pair of
50/62.5 µm
MM fiber patch
cords per
interface for FE
DIOM_40 can also be equipped as a mixed module including optical and

electrical interfaces by inserting an electrical SFP in the port. The cabling to
such port is made as a connection to an electrical interface listed in the
following table.
mating connectors needed for the DIOM electrical modules.
Table 3-10: DIOM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data
DIOM Port Interface type Cable type Mating Qty/
DIOM_04 1-4 10/100/1000BaseT CAT5E SFTP RJ-45 4

4-pair
DIOM_08 1-8 10/100BaseT CAT5E SFTP RJ-45 8

4-pair
Table 3-11: MCSM optical fibers and mating connector data
MCSM Port Interface type Fiber type Mating Qty/
MCSM 1-8 GbE/FE 1 pair of LC male 16 fibers
50/62.5 µm
MM fiber, or 1
pair of 9 µm
SM fiber patch
cords per
interface for
GbE
1 pair of
50/62.5 µm
MM fiber patch
cords per
interface for FE
mating connectors needed for the MCSM module.
Table 3-12: MCSM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data
MCSM Port Interface type Cable type Mating Qty/
MCSM 9-16 10/100BaseT CAT5E SFTP RJ-45 8
4-pair

ADR-10000 Accessories
SAGEMCOM offers accessories for efficient and optimal installation of
equipment in racks. This section describes the main types of accessories. If you
need custom modification to standard items, contact SAGEMCOM’s Network
Solutions Division support team or your SAGEMCOM sales representative.
xRAP-B
NOTE: The xRAP-B is no longer included in new ADR

deliveries (EOL). This information is included here if needed
for a current installation.
The xRAP-B is a power distribution and alarm panel for ADR shelves installed
in racks. The xRAP-B performs the following main functions:
| Power distribution for one or two ADR-10000 shelves. The nominal DC
power voltage is -48 VDC, ranging to -57.6 VDC. Since ADR-10000
shelves can use redundant power sources, the xRAP-B supports connection
to two separate DC power circuits. The internal circuits of the xRAP-B are
powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of
DC power within the xRAP-B is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
The xRAP-B has two 5-pin DC output connectors for supplying power to
any shelf in the ADR-10000 family of products. The maximum power that
can be supplied to each ADR shelf is up to 2250 W, in accordance with the
shelf type and version. The xRAP-B uses a single 50 mm2 power cable to
supply up to 4500 W in total to two ADR platforms.
Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker that
also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied
with the ADR-10000 shelves, and therefore their current rating is in
accordance with the order requirements.
The circuit breakers are installed during the xRAP-B installation. To
prevent accidental changing of a circuit breaker’s state, the circuit breakers
can be reached only after opening the front cover of the xRAP-B. The
circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
| Bay alarm indications. The xRAP-B includes four alarm indicators, one
for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received
simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in ADR
shelves installed in the rack.
| Connecting alarms from two ADR shelves, each shelf with maximum four
alarm inputs and four alarm outputs (via dry contacts) to the customer's
central alarm monitoring system.

| Exporting severity alarms. Two separate groups of severity alarms (a
group for each ADR shelf) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's
central alarm monitoring system.
| Exporting Critical buzzer signals. The Critical alarm signal is provided
via dry contacts to the customer's central alarm monitoring system for
activation of a Critical buzzer. A separate line is provided as well for
muting this buzzer, by connecting the line to a momentary switch.
NOTE: The xRAP-B is backwards compatible with the

xRAP-HP.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-B, and the table lists
the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout
numbers.
Figure 3-2: xRAP-B front panel

Table 3-13: xRAP-B front panel component functions
No. Designation Function
1 SOURCE A Translucent cover for the two circuit breakers
(designated Shelf 1 and Shelf 2 – one per ADR shelf
installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as
ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for
the DC power source A.
2 TEST Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the
indicators on for test purposes.
3 POWER ON Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power
source is connected to the xRAP-B.
4 CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an
unacknowledged alarm in the shelves connected to the
xRAP-B is Critical.
5 MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an
xRAP-B is Major.
6 MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an
xRAP-B is Minor.
7 WARNING White indicator, lights when the severity of an
xRAP-B is Warning.
8 Buzzer Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or
(concealed Critical alarm is present in the shelves connected to the
under cover) xRAP-B.
9 SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.
The xRAP-B connectors are located on the circuit board, as shown in the
following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The index numbers in
the table correspond to those in the figures.
Figure 3-3: xRAP-B connectors

Table 3-14: xRAP-B connector functions
1, 2 Shelves DC input Two 5-pin D-type connectors designated Shelf 1
power and Shelf 2 for connecting DC power to ADR
shelves.
3 ALARMS 68-pin SCSI connector for connecting external
alarm inputs, external alarm outputs, and severity
alarms to the customer alarm monitoring system.
4, 5 SHELF alarms Two 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF
1 and SHELF 2 for connecting alarm input 3 and
output lines to ADR-10000 shelves installed in
the rack.
3
Alarm input lines arrive through the ALARM connector and are connected to the corresponding SHELF connector.

xRAP-D
The xRAP-D is a power distribution and alarm panel for ADR shelves installed
in racks. The xRAP-D performs the following main functions:
| Redundant power distribution for one or two ADR shelves. The
xRAP-D can support either one or two ADR shelves. Each shelf can work
with either one or two power inputs, where one is the main power input (A)
and the second is an optional protective backup power input (B). The
xRAP-D can work with up to two redundant input power sources,
depending on the user's electric infrastructure.
In the default configuration, the xRAP-D supplies independent streams of
power to two separate ADR platforms. Input power for one ADR platform
is kept completely separate from the input power for the second ADR
platform. Separate input power cables from the power sources feed into
independent circuit breakers on the xRAP-D unit. (There are a total of four
circuit breakers on the xRAP-D, supporting redundant power supplies for
up to two ADR shelves.) The power supply flow for two platforms is
illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-4: xRAP-D power supply flow
The xRAP-D has four 5-pin DC output connectors for supplying redundant
power to any shelf in the ADR-10000 family of products. The maximum
power supplied to each ADR shelf is up to 2250 W, in accordance with the
shelf type and version.

Note that with the default configuration, the power cables from the user's
power supply sources to the xRAP-D do not have to be more than 25 mm2
thick, and the circuit breakers do not have to be more than 55A, because the
maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2250 W.
Previous xRAP units used a single heavy duty power cable to supply power
for up to two ADR shelves. The xRAP-D enables independent power
delivery to two shelves through separate cables, enabling use of thinner
cables and smaller circuit breakers. The xRAP-D was developed in
response to the needs of customers who are not able to support large
aggregate power feeding requirements when supporting two ADR
platforms.
NOTE: Users who prefer to work with a single power cable

from their main power supply (and optionally, a single power
cable from the protective power supply) can still work with a
single cable if they either:
| Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support a single
ADR platform only, with a maximum of 2250 W for that
shelf.
| Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support two
ADR platforms, where each platform is limited to a
maximum of 1100 W for per shelf. This configuration
option requires the use of an optional metal bridge
component designed by SAGEMCOM for this purpose.
(Note that this configuration option is only available from
V7.2, when the management software enforces limitations
on maximum power consumption.)
| Work with a single 50 mm2 power cable to support two
ADR platforms, with a maximum of 2250 W for each
shelf. This configuration option requires the use of an
optional metal bridge component designed by
SAGEMCOM for this purpose.
For more information about the bridge-component
configuration options, see Connecting DC Input Power Cable
to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.
The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC, ranging to -57.6 VDC. The
internal circuits of the xRAP-D are powered whenever at least one power
source is connected. The presence of DC power within the xRAP-D is
indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker that
also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied
with the ADR-10000 shelves, and therefore their current rating is in
accordance with the order requirements.

The circuit breakers are installed during the xRAP-D installation. To
prevent accidental changing of a circuit breaker’s state, the circuit breakers
can be reached easily after opening the front cover of the xRAP-D. The
circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
| Bay alarm indications. The xRAP-D includes four alarm indicators, one
for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received
simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever a Critical alarm is present in ADR shelves
connected to the xRAP-D.
| Connecting external alarms from two ADR shelves, each shelf supporting
up to four alarm inputs and four alarm outputs (via dry contacts) to the
customer's central alarm monitoring system. Clients who wish to define
external alarms should refer to the explanation of electrical capacity
requirements for external alarms in the ADR System Specification.
| Exporting severity alarms. Two separate groups of severity alarms (a
group of four for each ADR shelf) are provided via dry contacts for the
customer's central alarm monitoring system.
| Exporting Critical buzzer signals. The Critical alarm signal is provided
via dry contacts to the customer's central alarm monitoring system for
activation of a Critical buzzer. A separate line is provided as well for
muting this buzzer, by connecting the line to a ground with a momentary
switch.
NOTE: Note that the xRAP-D supports the same alarm and
power functions as the xRAP-B and xRAP-HP. When
replacing an existing xRAP-HP with an xRAP-D you must
also use the appropriate xRAP-D accessory kit, including
cables.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-D, and the table lists
the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout
numbers.
Figure 3-5: xRAP-D front panel

Table 3-15: xRAP-D front panel component functions
1 SOURCE A Translucent cover for the two circuit breakers (designated
Shelf 1 and Shelf 2 – one per ADR shelf installed in the

rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power
switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power
source A.
2 TEST Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the
indicators on for test purposes.
3 POWER ON Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power
source is connected to the xRAP-D.
4 CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an
xRAP-D is Critical.
5 MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an
xRAP-D is Major.
6 MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an
xRAP-D is Minor.
7 WARNING White indicator, lights when the severity of an
xRAP-D is Warning.
8 Buzzer Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or
(concealed Critical alarm is present in the shelves connected to the
under cover) xRAP-D.
9 SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.
The xRAP-D connectors are located on the circuit board, as shown in the
following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The index numbers in
the table correspond to those in the figures.
Figure 3-6: xRAP-D connectors

Table 3-16: xRAP-D connector functions
1, 2 Shelf 1 and Shelf 2 Two 5-pin D-type connectors, designated Shelf 1

DC input power and Shelf 2, used to connect DC power to the ADR
shelves.
3 ALARMS 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm
cable to the customer alarm monitoring system. This
alarm cable transmits the received from the ADR
shelves by the SHELF 1 and SHELF 2 connectors,
including external alarm inputs, external alarm
outputs, and ADR severity alarms.
4, 5 SHELF 1 and Two 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1
SHELF 2 and SHELF 2, used to connect alarm cables to the
ADR shelves installed in the rack. These cables
transmit alarms from the ADR shelf to the xRAP
unit.
Alarm signals arrive at a SHELF connector on the xRAP unit from two
different connector sources on the ADR shelf using a Y-Cable.
| A 9-pin connector on the ADR shelf labeled xRAP is used for the four
ADR severity alarms. (CRITICAL, MAJOR, MINOR, and WARNING)
| A 50-pin connector on the ADR shelf labeled ALARMS is used for any
external alarms defined by client request.

Rack Alarm Panel Power and Alarm
Connection Options
The xRAP product family supports power supply and alarms connection to the
various types of ADR platforms. A mixture of big and small ADR platforms is
possible in accordance with the platforms power consumption and the xRAP
total power. All xRAPs support redundancy through connections to two
separate power sources for each protected platform (i.e., two independent
circuit breakers are provided on the xRAP for each connected platform).
NOTE: The generic name xRAP is used when the text is

applicable for any one of the SAGEMCOM xRAP units
The following table lists the characteristics of the available xRAPs:

Table 3-17: RAP features
Features xRAP-D xRAP-B (EOL) xRAP-HP (EOL)
Number of ADR platforms with 2 2 2

redundant power support 4
(2 circuit breakers per
platform 5)
Total power consumption 4.5 KW 4.5 KW 4 KW

Severity alarms 6 Two separated groups Two separated groups Integrated, four alarms
of four alarms each of four alarms each from two platforms (OR
from two platforms from two platforms gate)
Separate buzzer signals Two separate buzzer Two separate buzzer ---
signals that report on signals that report on
"Critical" alarms "Critical" alarms
toward the user central toward the user central
monitor system monitor system
Separate buzzer shut-off signals Two separate buzzer Two separate buzzer ---
shut off signals that shut off signals that
mute the buzzer in the mute the buzzer in the
user central monitor user central monitor
system system
Number of input External Fixed, four inputs per Fixed, four inputs per Flexible 8, total eight
alarms 7 platform, total eight platform, total eight inputs per xRAP-HP
inputs per xRAP-D inputs per xRAP-B (up to Rev.C01)
For Rev.C02, fixed, four
inputs per platform, total
eight inputs
Number of output External Fixed, four outputs per Fixed, four outputs per Flexible 10, total eight
alarms 9 platform, total eight platform, total eight outputs per xRAP-HP

Features xRAP-D xRAP-B (EOL) xRAP-HP (EOL)
outputs per xRAP-D outputs per xRAP-B (up to Rev.C01)
For Rev.C02, fixed, four
outputs per platform,
total eight outputs
Connector type 5 pin connector 5 pin connector Terminal lug
for power cable between xINF
and xRAP (xRAP side)
Cable size between xRAP and 25 mm2 11 50 mm2 50 mm2
batteries (connects with (1+1) & (1+1) (1+1) (1+1)
terminal lugs) Two inputs for side A
and two inputs for side
B
NOTE: Beginning with V7.2, platform power supply

limitations are enforced by the management software. Upper
bound limits for total platform power usage are defined
through the management configuration variables. The upper
bound limits are enforced through software protection. For
more information, see the EMS-ADR User Manual.
Equipment Installation
The following sections provide general instructions for the installation of the
ADR-10000 and auxiliary equipment.
The procedures for equipment replacement and upgrades are similar to those
described for installation of the equipment, and when relevant, notes regarding
live replacement or upgrade are inserted in these procedures.
The information appearing in these sections should be used in conjunction with
specific site installation plans in the particular customer network. If you are
interested in obtaining design or installation assistance from SAGEMCOM
Networks Solutions Division’s Customer Support team, or wish to prepare a
network installation plan, contact your SAGEMCOM sales representative.
The ADR-10000 shelf, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described
in the ADR-1000 Product Line Reference Manual.
Preliminary Preparations
The installation procedures provided in this chapter assume that:
4
The number of supported shelves depends on their total power consumption.
5
The same type of circuit breaker is used in all xRAP versions. The value of the circuit breaker is defined by the
power consumption requirements of the shelf and not by the type of xRAP.
6
Critical, Major, Warning, and Minor alarms toward the customer central monitoring system.
7
External Alarms input via Opto coupler.
8
Using dip switches.
9
External Alarms output via dry contacts.
10
Using dip switches.
11
Bridge option to work with a single 50mm2 power cable available.

| The sites at which the installation procedures are carried out comply with
the requirements listed in Site Preparation (on page 3-1).
| The preliminary preparations specified in Before You Start/Safety
Guidelines (on page 1-1) have been completed.
Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by
referring to the site installation plan, and note the exact position of each unit (to
avoid errors, it is recommended that you mark the prescribed positions on the
rack rails using a soft pencil).
Equipment Installation Sequence

Each component of the ADR-10000 system is supplied separately and must be
installed in the correct sequence, according to the site plan.
The ADR-10000 shelf can be mounted in the rack in an horizontal or vertical
position. The main equipment used for both installations is similar, and differs
in the number of accessories, type of brackets used in each position, and one
accessory, used only for horizontal mountings.
NOTE:
If you are not installing an FST for a particular ADR-
10000 shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty
space in the rack in case optical modules are added to the
shelf in the future.
If you are not installing a TPU for a particular ADR-
10000 shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty
space in the rack so that the protection unit can be added
in the future, if required, without interrupting operation.
CAUTION:
If additional equipment is used in the rack, a heat buffer or
a buffer plate must be installed between any such
additional equipment and the ADR-10000 shelf to
minimize the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf. This heat
buffer must be purchased from SAGEMCOM.
During the installation of equipment in the rack, make
sure all the optical connectors are closed by protective
caps. Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is
connected to the corresponding connector.
Several installation options are illustrated in Installation Options (on page 4-1).

ADR-10000 Horizontal Shelf and Accessories
Installation Sequence
A high-density installation of a horizontal ADR-10000 shelf and corresponding
accessories might include the equipment illustrated in the following figure. The
different components are described alongside a number indicating the step in
which the component is installed, and corresponding to the steps in the table
that follows.
ADR-10000 shelf (4)
ADR-10000 with two TPUs
Figure 3-7: Components of ADR-10000 horizontal installation

Depending on the specific equipment being installed according to the site
installation plan, the installation of an ADR-10000 system comprises the
general stages in the order of execution set out in the following table.
Table 3-18: Outline of ADR-10000 horizontal installation sequence
Step Procedure Section
1. Install a rack (if required). Rack Installation (on page 3-
37)
2. Unpack and perform a visual inspection. Unpacking and Performing
Visual Inspection (on page 3-5)
3. Install ancillary equipment in the rack, Installing Ancillary Units in
including: Racks (on page 3-42)
| xRAP-B or xRAP-D
| Cable guides (two)
| Cable slack tray
| Fiber guides for ETSI A racks (two)
| FST (optional)
| ODF units (optional)
| Optical Patch Panel (OPP)
Note: Installation of the optional
xDDF-21 channel patch panel is
implemented as part of the traffic cable
routing process.
4. Install the ADR-10000 shelf in the rack. Installing the ADR-10000 Shelf
Note: If your site installation plan in Racks (on page 4-7)
includes TPU protection, the ADR-
10000 is supplied with the TPU already
installed. If you need to connect a TPU
unit to an existing ADR-10000 shelf, see
Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR-
10000 Shelf (on page 5-25).
5. Install the air filter. Installing the Air Filter

6. Install the common cards in the ADR- Installing ADR-10000 Cards
10000 shelf, including: (on page 5-1)
| FCU300
| ECU300/ECU300-F
| MXC300 with NVM flash card
7. Install the modules in the ADR-10000 Installing ADR-10000 Modules

shelf, including:
| Optical and electrical I/O modules
(SIM, PIM)
| EISMB/MCSM/DIOM data
modules

| Optical I/O cards (SIM16_4 or
SIM64_XFP)
| SFP transceivers in optical ADR-
10000 modules
8. Install cards and modules in the optional Installing TPU Modules (on
TPU, including: page 5-19)
| TC/TCF module
| Single-slot TPMs
| Double-slot TPMs
| Triple-slot TPMs
9. Install blank covers where I/O modules, —
cards, and TPMs are not used.
10. Route and connect all cables and fibers Connecting Fibers and Cables
for ETSI A racks, including: in ETSI A Racks (on page 6-1)
| Power and alarm cables
| Optical fibers to optical modules
transceivers
| Electrical interface cables to
electrical modules (includes
installation of the optional xDDF-21
channel patch panel)
| Electrical traffic through the TPU
| Data cables to
EISMB/MCSM/DIOM modules
| Timing cables
| Management cables
11. In some cases, it may be necessary to Attaching TPUs/OCU to the

connect a TPU unit to an existing ADR- ADR-10000 Shelf (on page 5-
10000 shelf. 25)

ADR-10000 Vertical Shelf and Accessories
Installation Sequence
A high-density installation of a vertical ADR-10000 shelf and corresponding
accessories might include the equipment illustrated in the following figure. The
different components are described alongside a number indicating the step in
which the component is installed, and corresponding to the steps in the table
that follows.
ADR-10000 shelf (5) including
ADR-10000 shelf
Figure 3-8: Components of ADR-10000 vertical installation

Table 3-19: Outline of vertical ADR-10000 installation sequence
1. Install a rack (if required). Rack Installation (on page 3-

37)
2. Unpack and perform a visual inspection. Unpacking and Performing
Visual Inspection (on page 3-5)
3. Install ancillary equipment in the rack, Installing Ancillary Units in
including: Racks (on page 3-42)
| xRAP-B or xRAP-D
| Cable guide
| Fiber guide for ETSI A racks
| FST (optional)
| ODF units (optional)
| OPP (optional)
Note: Installation of the optional
xDDF-21 channel patch panel is
implemented as part of the traffic cable
routing process.
4. Prepare the ADR-10000 shelf for

vertical installation:
| Remove the horizontal installation
brackets.
| Install vertical installation brackets.
5. Install the ADR-10000 shelf in the rack. Installing the ADR-10000 Shelf
Note: If your site installation plan in Racks (on page 4-7)
includes TPU protection, the ADR-
10000 is supplied with the TPU already
installed. If you need to connect a TPU
unit to an existing ADR-10000 shelf, see
Installing a TPU on the ADR-10000
Shelf.
6. Install the air filter. Installing the Air Filter
7. Install the common cards in the ADR- Installing ADR-10000 Cards
10000 shelf, including: (on page 5-1)
| FCU300
| ECU300/ECU300-F
| MXC300 with NVM flash card

8. Install the modules in the ADR-10000 Installing ADR-10000 Modules
shelf, including: (on page 5-10)
| Optical and electrical I/O modules
(SIM, PIM)
| EISMB/MCSM/DIOM data
modules
| Optical I/O cards (SIM16_4 or
SIM64_XFP)
| SFP transceivers in optical ADR-
10000 modules
9. Install cards and modules in the optional Installing TPU Modules
TPU, including:
| TC/TCF module
| Single-slot TPMs
| Double-slot TPMs
| Triple-slot TPMs
10. Install blank covers where I/O modules, —

cards, and TPMs are not used.
11. Route and connect all cables and fibers Connecting Fibers and Cables
for ETSI A racks, including: in ETSI A Racks (on page 6-1)
| Power and alarm cables
| Optical fibers to optical modules
transceivers
Electrical interface cables to electrical
modules (includes installation of the
optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel)
| Electrical traffic through the TPU
| Data cables to
EISMB/MCSM/DIOM modules
| Timing cables
| Management cables
12. In some cases, it may be necessary to Installing a TPU on the ADR-

connect a TPU unit to an existing ADR- 10000 Shelf
10000 shelf.
Outline of Installation Procedure

The main steps involved in the installation of an ADR-10000 shelf are listed
below. Consult your site installation plans for specific details.
1. Prepare the installation site (see "Site Preparation" on page 3-1) and check
physical location, environmental compliance, and availability of power
sources.
2. Prepare power, alarm, and management cables at the installation site (see
"Platform Installation" on page 4-1).
3. Prepare transmission cables at the installation site.

4. Route the required power, alarm, management, and transmission cables to
the intended ADR-10000 equipment location (see "Platform Installation" on
page 4-1).
5. If required, install the equipment racks (see "Rack Installation" on page 3-
37).
6. Mark the location of each ADR-10000 shelf and relevant accessories Fiber
Storage Tray (FST), patch panels, and Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) on
each rack, in accordance with the site installation plan.
NOTE: If you are currently installing an ADR-10000 shelf

without TPU protection, you may want to leave sufficient
space above/under the shelf to enable the addition of the
TPU/TPUs at a later stage.
7. When applicable, install the EMS-ADR management station (see the EMS-
ADR User Manual).
8. Install the power distribution and alarm panels – xRAP-B (on page 3-18),
xRAP-D (on page 3-22) and other equipment needed in each rack.
9. Install the ADR-10000 shelves in the appropriate rack.
10. For each ADR-10000 shelf where optical modules are used, install an FST
above the ADR-10000 shelf and route the optical fibers to the FST (see
"Installing the FST" on page 3-70).
NOTE: Even if you are not currently installing an FST, it is

recommended that you leave enough space above the ADR-
10000 shelf to enable future installation, in case optical
modules are added to the shelf at a later stage.
11. Install the ECU300/ECU300-F, FCU300, MXC300, and I/O cards in the
shelf (see "Installing ADR-10000 Cards" on page 5-1).
12. Install the prescribed I/O modules in the shelf.
13. If applicable, install the TC card and the prescribed TPMs in the TPU.
14. Depending on the modules in your ADR-10000 shelf:
Route the optical fibers from the FST to the relevant module
connectors.
Route the E1 electrical cables to the patch panel location.
Route the data cables to the data modules (EISMB/DIOM/MCSM).
Install a patch panel for each ADR-10000 shelf where electrical E1
modules are used and 120 Ω/75 Ω conversion is required. You will
need a separate patch panel for each PIM2_21 module in the shelf.

NOTE: The patch panel can be installed on the same rack
above the ADR-10000 shelf or on a different rack.
Connect coaxial and multipair traffic cables to the electrical I/O

modules if you are not using a TPU, or for modules which are not
protected.
Connect both the electrical I/O modules and the coaxial and multipair
traffic cables to the TPU if you are using a TPU.
Refer to the relevant section for the rack type in use (ETSI A).
15. Connect control cables between ECU300/ECU300-F, and management
station.
16. Connect management cables between the equipment installed in the rack
and the management station.
17. Connect power and alarm monitoring cables from the RAP panels to each
ADR-10000 installed in the rack, as described in Connecting Power Cables
(on page 6-3) and Connecting Alarm Cables (on page 6-3).
NOTE: In some cases, you may need to add a TPU after the
ADR-10000 has already been installed. Instructions for this
procedure are provided in Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR-
10000 shelf (on page 5-25).
Rack Installation
Installing Equipment Racks
NOTE: The instructions in this Appendix are relevant to the

installation of all rack types. However, it is recommended that
ADR-10000 shelves be installed in ETSI A racks.
Rack Floor Marking

You need to mark out the rack floor plan before installing the rack.
Before you start:

Before starting, find the prescribed location of each equipment rack.
If you have not yet unpacked the rack and the associated mounting kits, do so
now (see Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (on page 3-5)).

To mark out the rack floor plan:
1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the
floor plan template corresponding to the type of rack being installed:
ETSI A racks: Use template of diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for
ETSI racks (on page 3-39).
23 in. rack: Use template of diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for 19"
and 23" racks (on page 3-40).
19 in. rack: Use template of diagram b. of Mounting diagrams for 19"
and 23" racks (on page 3-40).
The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks.
2. If the installation is located at a site with a floating (suspended) floor, also
mark out all cable entry slots.
3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for
equipment bolting.
Rack Installation on Concrete Floors

This section describes how to install racks on concrete floors.
To mount the rack on a concrete floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (on page 3-39)
diagram a. or b. of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (on page 3-
40)).
2. Insert expansion shields into the holes.
3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
4. Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit, in
accordance with diagram b. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks, or
diagram c. of Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks.
Rack Installation on Wooden Floors

This section describes how to install racks on wooden floors.
To mount the rack on a wooden floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (see the following figures), using a 5-mm drill bit.

3. Secure the rack to the floor using the appropriate wood screws (see the
following figures).
Figure 3-9: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks

12 mm - 4 places φ12 mm - 4 places
1-45/64” 1-45/64”
6-1/2” 9-29/32” 6-1/2” 9-29/32”
18-1/2” 14-1/2”
3-11/16” 3-11/16”
25-7/8” 21-7/8”
a. 23” wide bay mounting hole drilling template b. 19” wide bay mounting hole drilling template
SCREW M12X50
FLAT WASHER
SPACER
M12 EXPANSION SHIELD
SQUARE WASHER
ANCHOR BRACKET
UNEQUAL FLANGE RACK
OPEN DUCT
4” STAGE FLOOR LEVEL
c. Bolting diagram – concrete floor
Figure 3-10: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks
Rack Installation on Floating (Suspended)

Floors
This section describes how to install racks on floating (suspended) floors.
To mount the rack on a floating (suspended) floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in the suspended floor in accordance with
the appropriate template.
3. Secure the rack to the floor in accordance with diagram c. of Mounting
diagrams for ETSI racks (on page 3-39).

Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly
This section describes how to install racks on a suspended overhead tray.
To mount the rack on a suspended overhead tray:

1. Refer to the suspended overhead tray diagram (see the following figure) and
position the overhead rack securing brackets.
2. Secure the rack to the overhead cabling trays, using the adjustable brackets.
2200 mm high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm racks are
generally attached only to the ceiling.
NUT M8
LOCK WASHER UPPER BRACKET 550
LOCK WASHER
FLAT WASHER CEILING
CEILING SCREW M8X20
FLAT WASHER
640 MAX
50 MIN
NUT M8
FLAT WASHER
SCREW M8X20
Figure 3-11: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead

tray (2200 mm rack)
Installing Extendable Rails

In high-density installations, it may be necessary to install the xRAP above the
rack using the extendable installation rails available from SAGEMCOM.
In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before
installing the equipment.
Rack Grounding
Immediately after installing the rack, connect its grounding stud to the
prescribed grounding point on the site grounding bar. Use a grounding lead that
meets the Rack grounding requirements listed in section Before You Start.

19 in. Rack Installation
The ADR-10000 can also be installed in European 19 in. racks. This is accepted
under the limitations that the rack's general dimensions are according to the
following figure. Any other European 19 in. rack must first be examined and
approved by SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division Mechanical
Department.
Front view Side view Rear view Top view
597 597 597 597

512
605.5
667
600
500
Maximum distance
between levels
2021
1912
499mm
625
515
44
Z 538
Mounting angle
355
Foremost position
Detail Z
44500
515
538
Figure 3-12: Example of an approved European 19" rack
Installing Ancillary Units in

Racks
SAGEMCOM offers various accessories for efficient installation of equipment
in racks. Contact SAGEMCOM’s Customer Support team or your
SAGEMCOM sales representative if you need custom modifications to
standard items or additional items.
This section includes instructions for the installation of ancillary units. The
specific units you will need to install depend on your site installation plan, and
may include one or more of the following:
| RAP power distribution frame, usually located at the top of the rack:
xRAP-D – Installing the xRAP-D (on page 3-43), for connection of up
to two ADR-10000 shelves on the same rack
xRAP-B – Installing the xRAP-B (on page 3-58), for connection of up
to two ADR-10000 shelves on the same rack
| Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks (on page 3-69)

| FST located above the ADR-10000 shelf accessories, recommended for
installations with a large number of optical modules – Installing the FST
(on page 3-70)
| ODF units – Installing the ODF (on page 3-71)
| OPP – Installing the OPP (on page 3-74)
In addition, you may need to install an xDDF-21 patch panel where PIM2_21
and PIM2_63/B are used, and where conversion between balanced 120 Ω and
unbalanced 75 Ω interfaces is required. The xDDF-21 patch panel can be
installed in the same rack above the ADR-10000 shelf, or in a different rack
with a longer SCSI cable running from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63/B in the
ADR-10000 shelf to the patch panel.
Installation of the xDDF-21 patch panel is implemented as part of the traffic
cable connection procedure described in Routing and Connecting Electrical
Interface Cables to Electrical Modules (on page 6-5).
In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Philips
screws. No preparation is required before installation. The following sections
provide mechanical installation instructions for units that require additional
procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.
CAUTION: If additional equipment other than ADR-10000

shelves is used in the rack, a heat buffer must be installed
between any such additional equipment and the ADR-10000
shelf to minimize the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf.
Consult your SAGEMCOM representative regarding the
exact heat buffer required.
Installing the xRAP-D
NOTE: Skip this section if the xRAP-D is not used.
Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (on page 3-11).
The installation of an xRAP-D unit includes the following steps:
1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the xRAP-D in the prescribed location, either at the top of the rack or
on the extendable installation rails.
3. Ground the xRAP-D to the rack grounding stud.

4. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-D. Depending on the site
power requirements, one of the following cable connections options should
be chosen:
a. In most configurations, either one or two standard (25mm2) input power
cables are connected to each side of the xRAP-D unit. This option is
described in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (on
page 3-48).
b. Alternatively, a single power input cable may be connected to the
xRAP-D using a bridge component. This option is described in
Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge
Component.
5. Attach protective covers to the sides and bottom of the xRAP-D unit.
(From V7.15 only, required for NEBS; optional for all others.)
6. Connect the DC power cables of the ADR-10000 shelves to the xRAP-D.
7. Install circuit breakers.
8. Check DC voltage polarity.
9. Connect the alarm cables.
For a description of the xRAP-D, refer to the ADR-10000 Product Line
Reference Manual.
Preparing DC Input Power Cables

The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and the
xRAP-D source A and source B inputs. When working with the xRAP-D, four
sets of cables are typically required, two for each source.

of residence.

Before you start:
In the xRAP-D, two 25 mm2 power cables are typically used for each power
source. When working in the recommended redundant mode with all power
cables connected, the xRAP-D works with a full set of input power cables and
backup power cables. This option, illustrated in the following figure, is
described in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (on page 3-
48).

Another power configuration option supported by the xRAP-D enables use of a
single power input cable to support either one or two ADR platforms. The
single power cable is connected to the xRAP-D using a bridge component. Two
variations of this option are illustrated in the following figure. This option is
described in Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge
Component.
Figure 3-14: xRAP-D power supply with bridge, two variations
NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-D is able to work with

only a single 25 mm2 power cable from each power source.
This supplies enough power to support a single ADR platform
with 2250 W, or two ADR platforms where each platform is
limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per shelf. In many cases,
this configuration is sufficient.
However, it is recommended, if at all possible, to connect all
input power cables from all power sources to the xRAP-D
unit upon the initial system installation. Connecting all cables
from the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any
later system upgrades, since the power cables are already in
place and ready to supply power to a second ADR platform, if
the network configuration is ever changed.

Each input power cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross
section of 25 (or 50) mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated
with a two-hole compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with
the equipment.
If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location,
make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before
attaching the lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.
5. Repeat these steps for each DC power cable being used.
To install the xRAP-D:

| Attach the xRAP-D to the rack side rails in the top position, and secure it
with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the xRAP-D:

1. The xRAP-D grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the
following figure of the xRAP-D to identify the grounding stud.
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements
described in Grounding Requirements (on page 1-8).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-D grounding
stud using a spring washer and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack grounding
stud.
Figure 3-15: Location of xRAP-D grounding stud

Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the
xRAP-D
In the xRAP-D, two 25 mm2 power cables are typically used for each power
source. When working in the recommended redundant mode with all power
cables connected, the xRAP-D works with four sets of input power cables. This
typical configuration option is described in this section.

NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-D is able to work with
only a single 25 mm2 power cable from each power source.
This supplies enough power to support a single ADR platform
with 2250 W, or two ADR platforms where each platform is
limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per shelf. In many cases,
this configuration is sufficient. The instructions in this section
apply to this configuration option also. (This configuration
option is only available from V7.2, when the management
software enforces limitations on maximum power
consumption.)
However, it is recommended, if at all possible, to connect all
input power cables from the power sources to the xRAP-D
unit upon the initial system installation. Connecting all cables
from the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any
later system upgrades, since the power cables are already in
place and ready to supply power to a second ADR platform, if
the network configuration is ever changed.
Alternatively, a single power input cable supporting two ADR
platforms may be connected to the xRAP-D using a bridge
component. This option is described in Connecting DC Input
Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.
To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-D:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
xRAP-D by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-17: Identification of xRAP-D cable routes

2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover and remove
the cover.
Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board in
accordance with the following figure. This figure shows the terminals at the
source A side (main); the same board is used at the source B side
(protection).
Note that there are two complete sets of power terminals and circuit
breakers on each side. Separate input power cables from the user's input
power supply feed through the two sets of input power terminals into the
two circuit breakers on the source A side, supplying independent power
sources for up to two ADR shelves. Each circuit breaker feeds into a
separate power output connection for the power cable that connects to the
ADR shelf.
Similarly, separate input power cables from the user's input power supply
feed through separate input terminals into the two circuit breakers on the
source B side, and from the circuit breakers feed into the additional power
output connections that provide an optional protective backup power supply
for up to two ADR shelves.
Figure 3-18: Connecting DC power cables
The preceding figure portrays the electrical connections on the left side of
the xRAP-D, the side that connects to the user's main power supply for the
ADR shelves being powered. The right side of the xRAP-D contains a
mirror image of the connections illustrated in the preceding figure. The
right side connects to the user's (optional) backup protective power supply
for the shelves.

CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to
identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP-D power terminal
board.
3. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate
xRAP-D opening.
4. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminals, marked (+) on
the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-D works with two sets of
positive terminals, used with two 25 mm2 power cables.
5. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the
nut with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm.
6. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-D works with two sets of
negative terminals, used with two 25 mm2 power cables.
7. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
8. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
9. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of
the xRAP-D (see To ground the xRAP-D (on page 3-47)), and attach them
to the retainers with cable ties.

Attaching Protective Covers
From V7.15 only, as required for NEBS. Optional for all others.
To attach protective covers on the xRAP-D:

1. From the open back end, look at the inside panel of the xRAP-D unit. Find
the four screws in the left and right sides of the power panel. The two
screws on the left side are highlighted in the following figure.
Figure 3-19: Side screws highlighted on left side of xRAP-D unit
2. Find the replacement spacer screws included in the protective cover kit.
Note that four replacement spacer screws are included with the xRAP-D. A
replacement spacer screw is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-20: Replacement spacer screw

3. Replace the side screws with the replacement spacer screws. The following
figure illustrates the inside of the xRAP-D unit, highlighting the left side
replacement spacer screws in place.
Figure 3-21: Replacement spacer screws in place in xRAP-D unit
4. Find the small L-shaped protective covers included in the kit. Four
protective covers are included for the xRAP-D. The protective covers are
illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-22: Protection cover for xRAP-D

5. Place the protective covers into the xRAP-D, two covers on each side. For
each protective cover, the smaller hole fits onto the top of the spacer screw
on one side and the two larger holes are anchored on top of the two
terminals above the spacer screw. The jutting-out edge of the protective
cover fits into the opening on the edge of the xRAP next to the terminals.
The following figure illustrates protective covers inserted into the xRAP-D
unit.
Figure 3-23: xRAP-D protective covers in place
6. Secure the protective covers in place by screwing on the wing nuts supplied
in the kit onto the tops of the spacer screws on each side.
7. Find the protective bottom panel in the kit. The bottom panel for the
xRAP-D is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-24: Bottom panel for xRAP-D
8. Secure the bottom panel into place with the four screws supplied in the kit.

To connect the DC power cable for an ADR-10000 shelf:
1. Before starting, identify the shelf power connectors on the xRAP-D board
in accordance with the following figure.
Figure 3-25: xRAP-D connectors
2. Insert the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 5-pin D-type male
connector near the SOURCE A power connectors and connect it to
connector Shelf 1 (see preceding figure).
3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector.
4. If you are connecting an additional shelf to the xRAP-D, repeat the above
steps for the second shelf. Note that a maximum of 55A is supplied from
the power sources to each ADR platform. Power is supplied independently
to each ADR platform connected to the xRAP unit. Power is not shared
between ADR platforms.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the
shelves to source B.
6. Route the DC power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the
xRAP-D and attach them to the retainers with cable ties (see To ground the
xRAP-D (on page 3-47)).
7. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding shelf position, and securely attach the power cable to the
rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.
NOTE: Connect the cables to the shelves only after

completing the installation of the shelves and all other
components.

To install the xRAP-D circuit breakers:
1. If the xRAP-D front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover to its chassis and remove the
cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-26: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration.
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
xRAP-D source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If an additional shelf is powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to
insert the other circuit breaker into the corresponding shelf position of the
power terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B
circuit breakers.

To check the DC voltage polarity:
1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-D.
2. Set all xRAP-D circuit breakers to ON.
3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
and negative pins of each power cable.
CAUTION: Pay attention not to short-circuit the multimeter

leads when checking the voltage.
NOTE: The power cable terminates with a 3-pin (3W3), or a

5-pin (5W5) connector in accordance with the connected
ADR shelf. For a 3W3 connector the positive pin is A3 and
the negative pin A2; for a 5W5 connector the positive pins are
A4, A5, and the negative pins A2, A3.
4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -57.6 VDC)
and that it has the correct polarity.
5. Return all xRAP-D circuit breakers to OFF.
6. Disconnect the xRAP-D input power sources.
7. Reinstall the xRAP-D front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.
During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the connectors
in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (on page 3-48).
To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP-D:

1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables.
2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable to
the ALARMS connector, and then securely attach the cable to the rack
inner wall using cable ties.
3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended
for shelf 1 to the Shelf 1 connector on the xRAP-D.
4. Route the alarm cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the
xRAP-D (see the figure in To ground the xRAP-D (on page 3-47)), and
attach them to the bracket with cable ties.

5. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding
shelf position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its
function.
6. If an additional shelf is installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 for
the cables serving the additional shelf. Make sure to attach identification
tags to each cable end.
Installing the xRAP-B
NOTE: Skip this section if the xRAP-B is not used.
Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (on page 3-11).
The installation of an xRAP-B unit includes the following steps:
1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the xRAP-B in the prescribed location, either at the top of the rack or
on the extendable installation rails.
3. Ground the xRAP-B to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-B.
5. Attach protective covers to the sides and bottom of the xRAP-B unit.
(From V7.15 only, required for NEBS; optional for all others.)
6. Connect the DC power cables of the ADR-10000 shelves to the xRAP-B.
7. Install circuit breakers.
8. Check DC voltage polarity.
9. Connect the alarm cables.
For a description of the xRAP-B, refer to the ADR-10000 Product Line
Reference Manual.
NOTE: The xRAP-B is no longer included in new ADR

deliveries (EOL). This information is included here if needed
for a current installation.
The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and the
xRAP-B source A and source B inputs. When working with the xRAP-B, two
cables are required, one for each source.

of residence.
Before you start:

In the xRAP-B, a single 50 mm2 cable is used for each power source. Since the
xRAP-B is designed for redundancy through the use of two power sources, this
means that when working in the recommended redundant mode, the xRAP-B
works with two input power cables.
Each input power cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross
section of 50 mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
two-hole compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment.
If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location,
make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before
attaching the lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.
5. Repeat these steps for each DC power cable being used.
To install the xRAP-B:

| Attach the xRAP-B to the rack side rails in the top position, and secure it
with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.

To ground the xRAP-B:
1. The xRAP-B grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the
following figure of the xRAP-B to identify the grounding stud.
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements
described in Grounding Requirements (on page 1-8).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-B grounding
stud using a spring washer and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack grounding
stud.
Figure 3-27: Location of xRAP-B grounding stud
To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-B:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
xRAP-B by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-28: Identification of xRAP-B cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-B front cover and remove
the cover.

Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board in
accordance with the following figures. These figures show the terminals at
the source A side; the same board is used at the source B side.
Figure 3-29: Connecting DC power cables
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to

identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP-B power terminal
board.
3. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate
xRAP-B opening.
4. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminals, marked (+) on
the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-B works with a single set of
positive terminals, used with a 50 mm2 power cable.
5. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the
nut with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm.
6. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-B works with a single set of
negative terminals, used with a 50 mm2 power cable.
7. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
8. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
9. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of
the xRAP-B (see the figure in To ground the xRAP-B (on page 3-60)), and
attach them to the retainers with cable ties.

Attaching Protective Covers
From V7.15 only, as required for NEBS. Optional for all others.
To attach protective covers on the xRAP-B:

1. From the open back end, look at the inside panel of the xRAP-B unit. Find
the two screws in the center of the left and right sides of the power panel.
The screw on the left side is highlighted in the following figure.
Figure 3-30: Side screw highlighted on left side of the xRAP-B
2. Find the replacement spacer screws included in the protective cover kit.
Note that two replacement spacer screws are included with the xRAP-B. A
replacement spacer screw is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-31: Replacement spacer screw

3. Replace the side screws with the replacement spacer screws. The following
figure illustrates the inside of the xRAP-B unit, highlighting the left side
replacement spacer screw in place.
Figure 3-32: Replacement spacer screw in place in the xRAP-B
4. Find the small L-shaped protective covers included in the kit. Two
protective covers are included for use with the xRAP-B. The protective
covers are illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-33: Protective cover for xRAP-B

5. Place the protective covers into the xRAP-B, placing one cover on each
side. For each protective cover, the smaller hole fits onto the top of the
spacer screw on one side and the two larger holes are anchored on top of the
two terminals above the spacer screw. The jutting-out edge of the protective
cover fits into the opening on the edge of the xRAP next to the terminals.
The following figure illustrates a protective cover inserted into the xRAP-B
unit.
Figure 3-34: xRAP-B protective cover in place
6. Secure the protective covers in place by screwing on the wing nuts supplied
in the kit onto the tops of the spacer screws on each side.
7. Find the protective bottom panel in the kit. The bottom panel for the
xRAP-B is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-35: Bottom panel for xRAP-B

8. Secure the bottom panel into place with the four screws supplied in the kit.
To connect the DC power cable for an ADR-10000 shelf:

1. Before starting, identify the shelf power connectors on the xRAP-B board
in accordance with the following figures.
Figure 3-36: xRAP-B connectors
2. Insert the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 5-pin D-type male
connector near the SOURCE A power connectors and connect it to
connector Shelf 1 (see preceding figures).
3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector.
4. If you are connecting an additional shelf to the xRAP-B, repeat the above
steps for the second shelf. Note that a maximum of 55A is supplied from
the power sources to each ADR platform. Power is supplied independently
to each ADR platform connected to the xRAP unit. Power is not shared
between ADR platforms.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the
shelves to source B.
6. Route the DC power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the
xRAP-B and attach them to the retainers with cable ties (see the figure in
To ground the xRAP-B (on page 3-60)).
7. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding shelf position, and securely attach the power cable to the
rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.
NOTE: Connect the cables to the shelves only after

completing the installation of the shelves and all other
components.

Installing the xRAP-B circuit breakers
To install the xRAP-B circuit breakers:

1. If the xRAP-B front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the xRAP-B front cover to its chassis and remove the
cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-37: Installation of xRAP-B circuit breakers
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration.
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
xRAP-B source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figures.
4. If an additional shelf is powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to
insert the other circuit breaker into the corresponding shelf position of the
power terminal board.
If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B
circuit breakers.
Table 3-20: ADR-10000 recommended circuit breakers
Shelf type Maximum power Recommended CB
dissipation per shelf
ADR-10000 basic shelf 950 W/3241 35A
BTU/hr
ADR-10000 with TPU 1000 W/3412 35A
BTU/hr

Shelf type Maximum power Recommended CB
dissipation per shelf
ADR-10000 with two 1050 W/3583 35A
TPUs BTU/hr
ADR-10000 with two 1100 W/3753 35A
TPUs and one OCU BTU/hr
To check the DC voltage polarity:

1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-B.
2. Set all xRAP-B circuit breakers to ON.
3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
and negative pins of each power cable.
CAUTION: Pay attention not to short-circuit the multimeter

leads when checking the voltage.
NOTE: The power cable terminates with a 3-pin (3W3), or a

5-pin (5W5) connector in accordance with the connected
ADR shelf. For a 3W3 connector the positive pin is A3 and
the negative pin A2; for a 5W5 connector the positive pins are
A4, A5, and the negative pins A2, A3.
4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -57.6 VDC)
and that it has the correct polarity.
5. Return all xRAP-B circuit breakers to OFF.
6. Disconnect the xRAP-B input power sources.
7. Reinstall the xRAP-B front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.
To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP-B:

Use the figures illustrating the xRAP-B connectors (in Connecting DC power
cables (on page 3-61)) to identify the xRAP-B connector functions.
1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables.
2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable to
the ALARMS connector, and then securely attach the cable to the rack
inner wall using cable ties.
3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended
for shelf 1 to the Shelf 1 connector on the xRAP-B.

4. Route the alarm cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the
xRAP-B, (see figure in To ground the xRAP-B (on page 3-60)), and attach
them to the bracket with cable ties.
5. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding
shelf position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its
function.
6. If an additional shelf is installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 for
the cables serving the additional shelf. Make sure to attach identification
tags to each cable end.
Installing the Cable Guide

The number of cable guides required for horizontal ADR-10000 shelf
installations depends on whether electrical traffic modules are used in the upper
module cage. One cable guide should be installed one hole under the ADR-
10000, to help neatly route control, timing, and management cables connected
to the ECU300/ECU300-F card and traffic cables connected to electrical traffic
modules in the lower module cage. If electrical traffic modules are installed in
the upper module cage, an additional cable guide should be installed one
installation hole above the shelf.
One cable guide should be installed above the ADR-10000 shelf in vertical
installations.
The cable guide is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19”
racks and the other for ETSI racks.
To attach the rack mount brackets to the cable guide:

| Attach each bracket to the corresponding cable guide sidewall with the four
screws supplied in the installation kit.
Figure 3-38: Cable guide
To install the cable guide in the rack:

| Install the cable guide in the prescribed location in the rack, and fasten it to
the side rails of the rack with four screws.

Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks
The fiber guide for ETSI A racks should be installed one mounting hole above
the cable guide in the rack.
To attach the rack mount brackets to the fiber guide:

| Attach each bracket to the corresponding fiber guide sidewall with the four
screws supplied in the installation kit.
Figure 3-39: Fiber guide
To install the fiber guide in the rack:

| Install the cable guide in the rack one mounting hole above the cable guide
and fasten it to the rack side rails with four screws.
Installing the Cable Slack Tray

The cable slack tray is installed only in horizontal ADR-10000 shelf
installations that also have a lower cable guide installed; these usually also
include a fiber guide.
Figure 3-40: Cable slack tray
To install the cable slack tray in the rack:

| Install the cable slack tray in the rack one mounting hole under the cable
guide and fasten it to the rack side rails with two M6 screws, washers, and
nuts.

Installing the FST
The FST should be installed 50 mm above the fiber guide. If additional
equipment is installed above the FST, like another ADR-10000 shelf, an
additional 50 mm must be left free between the FST and such equipment.
To install the FST in the rack:

1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each shelf. When preparing the fiber,
refer to the safety information in Work and Equipment Safety.
3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of the ETSI A rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull
the FST towards you to open it.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it
fully so that you can thread the fibers.
6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-41: Threading optical fibers in the FST
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside

the FST, and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.

8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click.
CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are

closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with
the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap
until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding
connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a
cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm.
Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission
characteristics.
Installing the ODF

Identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack before performing the
following procedures.
The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19 in. and
ETSI racks, and the other for 23 in. 7 ft. racks. The 19 in./ETSI rack mount
brackets can be used for both ETSI and 19 in. racks.
To attach the rack mount brackets to the ODF:

1. Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mount
brackets.
2. Attach each bracket to the corresponding ODF side panel with three screws,
as shown in the figure.
Figure 3-42: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF

To connect optical fibers to the ODF:
1. Push the release button on the ODF front panel to the left to release the
latch and pull it towards you. The cover opens downwards.
Figure 3-43: ODF front panel
Figure 3-44: ODF open view
2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF
components.
3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the
ODF splice support.
4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.

Figure 3-45: ODF fiber routes
5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides to the splice support area.
6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber.
7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail,
and slide the splicing sleeve over the splice.
8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support.
NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF,

first start filling the slots of the lower splice support. After the
slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and
continue filling the support slots.
9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step 3.
10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit.
11. Close the ODF front cover by pushing it up till it clicks to the unit.
12. Refer to Attaching rack mount brackets (on page 3-71) and secure the user
fibers with cable ties to the fiber fastening bracket at the rear of the ODF.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the

cable ties.
To install ODF units in a rack:

| Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack
side rails with four screws.

Installing the OPP
The OPP can be installed in the same rack as the ADR-10000 or in other racks
according to the site installation requirements.
To mount the OPP in the rack:

1. Attach the OPP to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each shelf. When preparing the fiber,
follow the safety information appearing in Work and Equipment Safety.
3. Label the fibers in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of the ETSI A rack, or the rack sidewalls in case of an ETSI B rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the OPP to release the latch, and pull
the OPP towards you to open it.
NOTE: The OPP has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it
fully so that you can thread the fibers.
6. Thread the fibers into the OPP, as illustrated in Threading and connecting
optical fibers in the OPP (on page 3-75).
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside

the OPP, and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Identify the duplex connector position on the duplex connector panel (on
page 3-75).
8. Connect each equipment fiber to the corresponding network fiber according
to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of
each shelf.
9. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.
10. Return the OPP to the rack until it latches in place with a click.

The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 1.4 in. (35
mm). Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical
transmission characteristics.
Figure 3-46: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP

4
Platform Installation
In this chapter:
Installation Options..........................................................................................4-1
Installing the ADR-10000 Shelf in Racks .......................................................4-7
Grounding the ADR-10000 Shelf ..................................................................4-22
Installation Options
ADR-10000 shelves can be installed in ETSI A racks or a 19" 600 mm deep
racks (in consultation with and approved by SAGEMCOM's Mechanical
Department). These racks can be installed on wooden, concrete, or suspended
floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.
The ADR-10000 can be installed in the rack in an horizontal or vertical
position. In addition, the ADR-10000 can be expanded with one or two TPUs
and an OCU. Different brackets and mechanical adapters are available for
attaching the ADR-10000 to the rack in each of these positions.
NOTE: By default the ADR-10000 comes with brackets for

horizontal installation in ETSI A racks. For vertical
installation you must remove these brackets, and attach
vertical brackets, supplied with the installation kit.
If necessary, contact SAGEMCOM's Customer Support team or your

SAGEMCOM sales representative for help in meeting your specific installation
requirements.
The following sections describe the installation options of the ADR-10000.

Layout of ADR-10000 Horizontal Installation
in ETSI A Racks
The ADR-10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack may include, in
addition to the shelf itself, ancillary equipment such as RAP, cable guides for
low-order and high-order traffic cables, fiber guides, cable slack tray for cables
in the lower section of the ADR-10000, FST, and xDDF-21 patch panel,
according to the rack installation plan. Typical installations of the ADR-10000
in a horizontal position are shown in the following figures.
Figure 4-1: Typical ADR-10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack

Figure 4-2: Typical horizontal installation of two ADR-10000 shelves in an ETSI A

rack

ADR-10000
ADR-10000
ADR-10000
Figure 4-3: Typical horizontal installation of three basic ADR-10000 shelves in

2200 mm ETSI A rack

Figure 4-4: Typical horizontal installation of three ADR-10000 shelves with TPUs in
2600 mm ETSI A rack

Layout of ADR-10000 Vertical Installation in
ETSI A Racks
The ADR-10000 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack may include, in
addition to the shelf itself, ancillary equipment such as RAP, a cable guides for
low-order and high-order traffic cables, a fiber guide, FST, and xDDF-21 patch
panel, according to the rack installation plan. A typical installation of the ADR-
10000 in a vertical position is shown in the following figure.
ADR-10000
Figure 4-5: Typical ADR-10000 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack

Installing the ADR-10000 Shelf
in Racks
The ADR-10000 can be installed in the following rack types:
| SAGEMCOM's recommended ETSI rack (2200 mm or 2600 mm - hereafter
referred to as ETSI A), which provides the following benefits:
Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient
maintenance of all rack cables, including:
E1 cables
Control cables
Power cables
Data cables
Timing cables
Two ducts on the rack’s front rails for routing up to 200 optical fibers
Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension
floors and/or ceiling ladders
Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see
Environmental Requirements (on page 3-2))
Front door for left or right opening mounting
| 19" 600 mm deep rack (in consultation with and approved by
SAGEMCOM's Mechanical Department)
ADR-10000 equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating
floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. For information on the various
mounting options, see Rack Installation (on page 3-37).
By default, ADR-10000 shelves are supplied with brackets for horizontal
installation in ETSI A racks. The shelves come empty with no cards or modules
installed. Therefore, the installation activities covered in this section include:
| Attaching the ADR-10000 shelf to a rack. The shelf can be installed in a
horizontal or vertical position.
| Grounding the ADR-10000 shelf.
The installation of the ADR-10000 shelf in the vertical position requires a
workaround which is described in Installing the ADR-10000 Shelf in the
Vertical Position (on page 4-12).
After these procedures have been completed, the ADR-10000 shelf is ready for
the installation of:
| ECU300/ECU300-F, MXC300, and FCU300 cards, as described in
Installing ADR-10000 Cards (on page 5-1).
| I/O modules, as described in Installing ADR-10000 Modules.
| TPMs in the optional TPU, as described in Installing TPU Modules.

Environmental Considerations
Observe the following guidelines when installing the ADR-10000 in racks:
1. Free airflow through the rack must be guaranteed at all times.
2. ADR-10000 shelves can be installed in open or closed (with door) racks.
When installed in a closed rack, the door must be perforated. An example of
a rack with a perforated door is the ETSI A rack shown in the following
figure.
3. Always install the first ADR-10000 shelf in the lower part of the rack,
leaving a space of at least 1U from the bottom of the rack.
4. In mixed (horizontal and vertical airflow) equipment installations, always
install the equipment with the horizontal airflow in the lower part of the
rack, and the equipment with the vertical airflow above it.
5. Leave a space of at least 1U between the upper accessory of the ADR-
10000 and the next shelf.
6. Leave as much space as possible between the rack’s cable supports and the
ADR-10000 sidewalls.
7. Always consider the shelf airflow requirements when organizing the cable
and fiber routes near the ADR-10000 sidewalls.

Figure 4-6: ETSI A rack closed view
Typical ADR-10000 Installation

In addition to the ADR-10000 shelf itself, the equipment installed in the rack
includes:
| One Rack Alarm Panel (RAP) installed at the top of the rack, used to
connect external power and alarm monitoring lines to the ADR-10000
shelves installed in the rack. One of the following is suitable:
xRAP-B - fully supports up to two ADR-10000 shelves
In addition to the space needed for installing the RAP, you must leave at
least 50 mm free space under it for routing cables.

| Fiber Storage Tray (FST). A separate FST can be installed above each
ADR-10000 with optical modules. Each FST contains two storage reels,
enabling the fiber to be stored on the right or left side of the tray. Leave at
least 50 mm free space between the ADR-10000 cabling accessories and its
FST, and another 50 mm free between the FST and the next ADR-10000
shelf.
| Cable guide. Two units should be installed, one just above the ADR-10000
and one under it, to help neatly route the cables connected to the shelf.
| Two fiber guides, installed one above the upper cable guide and one under
the lower cable guide. Helps to neatly route fibers, while keeping the
minimum allowed bend radius.
| Cable slack tray. One unit should be installed under the lower fiber guide,
to help organize the slacks of cables connected to the lower module cage
and lower TPU.
| xDDF-21 (optional). A separate xDDF-21 panel can be used when
unbalanced 75 Ω interfaces need to be connected and converted to balanced
120 Ω interfaces of PIM2_21 and PIM2_63/B modules. Leave at least 100
mm free space above the ADR-10000 shelf and below the xDDF-21.
NOTE: If not otherwise specified ADR-10000 shelf

installations in racks shown in this manual refer to 2200 mm
ETSI A racks.

Figure 4-7: Typical ADR-10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack

Installing the ADR-10000 Shelf in the
Horizontal Position
The ADR-10000 shelf comes with brackets ready for installation in ETSI A
racks in the horizontal position.
To install an ADR-10000 shelf in the horizontal position in

an ETSI A rack:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the ADR-10000 shelf in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the ADR-10000 shelf in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to
the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
3. If required, based on the site installation plan, see Installing the FST (on
page 3-70) for instructions on installing an FST above the ADR-10000
accessories.
Installing the ADR-10000 Shelf in the

Vertical Position
Before installing the ADR-10000 shelf (in the vertical position), in an ETSI A
rack, you must prepare it by performing the following steps:
| Remove the horizontal installation brackets.
| Install the lower vertical bracket.
| Attach the vertical filter housing.
| Install the upper vertical bracket.
| Insert the vertical air filter.
The components required for the vertical installation are supplied in the
installation kit. The procedures required for preparing the ADR-10000 for
vertical installation follow.
CAUTION: When installing an ADR-10000 shelf vertically,

pay attention to position the shelf with the FCU300 facing
downwards. This is important to ensure proper ventilation of
the ADR-10000 shelf.

To remove the ADR-10000 shelf horizontal brackets:
1. Place the ADR-10000 shelf on a flat clean surface.
2. Remove the four screws fastening the horizontal bracket to the right side of
the shelf.
3. Repeat step 2 for the bracket on the left side of the shelf.
NOTE: The sides of the ADR-10000 shelf described

hereafter refer to the product installed in the vertical position.
For example, the lower (or bottom) side of the shelf is the
side near the FCU300.
To install the vertical lower bracket:

1. Orient the ADR-10000 shelf on a flat clean surface upside down.
2. Place the vertical lower bracket on the shelf, and fit the holes in the bracket
with the corresponding holes in the shelf.
3. Identify the two long screws and nine short screws according to the
following figure.

Figure 4-8: Installing the vertical lower bracket
4. Fasten the lower bracket to the shelf with two long screws and nine short
screws from the installation kit.

To prepare the filter frame assembly:
1. Identify the filter frame assembly parts according to the following figure.
Figure 4-9: Preparing the filter frame assembly
2. Insert the filter frame pin guides into the corresponding holes in the frame
support.
3. Attach the frame support to the filter frame.
To install the filter frame assembly:

1. Place the filter frame assembly at the rear of the lower bracket.
2. Insert the two front screws of the filter frame into the corresponding
latch-shaped holes in the bracket.
3. Identify the four long screws according to the following figure.

Figure 4-10: Installing the filter frame assembly
4. Attach the filter frame to the shelf and fasten it with four long screws from
the installation kit.

To install the vertical upper bracket:
1. Return the ADR-10000 shelf to normal position.
2. Place the shelf near the edge of the surface to enable the lower bracket to
protrude out.
3. Place the vertical upper bracket on the shelf, and fit the holes in the bracket
with the corresponding holes in the shelf.
Figure 4-11: Installing the vertical upper bracket
4. Fasten the upper bracket to the shelf with seven screws and washers from
the installation kit.
To attach the thumbnuts:

1. Lift both filter frame front screws to their upmost position.

2. Take two thumbnuts from the installation kit and fasten them on the screws.
Figure 4-12: Installing the thumbnuts
To attach an ADR-10000 shelf to a rack in the vertical

position:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the ADR-10000 shelf in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
WARNING: To perform this procedure safely, for both

personnel and equipment, get help from an additional person.
2. Place the ADR-10000 shelf in the prescribed position in the rack.

3. Align the holes on the ADR-10000's brackets with the holes at the rack's
side rails.
4. Attach the shelf to the rack on the upmost hole of the left bracket, and
lowest hole of the right bracket, with two screws and washers.

5. Secure the shelf to the rack with additional three screws and washers in
each bracket.
Installing the Vertical Air Filter

Normally, the filter frame is attached in its upmost position by two thumbnuts.
The frame must be lowered in order to gain access to the filter guides and to
install the filter.
To lower the filter frame:

1. Open the two thumbnuts until the filter frame screws are free to move.
Figure 4-13: Releasing the thumbnuts

2. Lower the filter frame screws to their very lowest position, to bring the
filter guides in front of the opening in the lower bracket.
Figure 4-14: Lowering the filter frame

The following figure shows the filter frame in the lower position.
Figure 4-15: Filter frame in lower position

To insert the vertical filter:
1. Identify the filter's air intake side indicated by two coding tabs.
2. Place the filter in front of the slot with the coding tabs facing downward.
Figure 4-16: Inserting the air filter
3. Insert the filter into the filter frame guides.

4. Push the filter in until it stops.
5. Lift the thumbnuts up and fasten them in place.
Grounding the ADR-10000 Shelf

Before you start:
Review the grounding requirements specified in Grounding Requirements (on
page 1-8) and Preparing Cables and Fibers (on page 3-7). Obtain the required
materials and make sure to perform the grounding connections in accordance
with these requirements.

WARNING:
The ground cable must be of at least the same thickness as
the xRAP power cable. Therefore, if the xRAP power
cable is thick, the grounding cable must match that
thickness.
The thickness of the shelf grounding cable must match the
thickness of the power cable from the xRAP to the shelf.

To ground the ADR-10000:
1. Connect the rack grounding stud to the site grounding bar, as illustrated in
the following figure.
Figure 4-17: ADR-10000 shelf and rack grounding
2. Connect the RAP grounding post to the rack grounding stud.

3. When NEBS compliance is required, for each ADR-10000 shelf installed in
the rack, connect a grounding strap from the two shelf grounding posts to
the RAP grounding post. Note that the grounding strap lug must be inserted
over both grounding posts.

procedures described here must be completed before, for
example, connecting an external PC to configure and
initialize the NE management system.

5
Card and Module Installation
In this chapter:
Installing ADR-10000 Cards ...........................................................................5-1
Installing ADR-10000 Modules.....................................................................5-10
Installing TPU Modules.................................................................................5-19
Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR-10000 Shelf............................................5-25
Installing ADR-10000 Cards

After the shelf has been installed and grounded, you can install the cards.
Before you start:

When installing cards, make sure to carefully align the card with the shelf guide
rails. Hold the card straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
CAUTION:
If you feel resistance when inserting cards, immediately
retract the card and repeat the process.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening
card screws.

FCU300 Card
The FCU300 card is installed in the rightmost vertical slot of the ADR-10000.
Figure 5-1: Installing the FCU300
To install the FCU300 card:

1. Check that the FCU300 has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the FCU300 from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware version indicated on the unit’s identification label.
4. Insert the rear end of the FCU300 into the card guides.
5. Push the FCU300 in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of
the card is flush with the front of the ADR-10000 shelf. If you feel
resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the fan unit out and repeat
the procedure.
6. Secure the FCU300 in place by tightening the two captive screws.

ECU300 Card
The ECU300 card is installed in the bottom horizontal slot of the card cage.
Installation is identical for the ECU300-F and ECU300 cards.
Figure 5-2: Installing the ECU300/ECU300-F
CAUTION: Take care not to change the position of the

ECU300/ECU300-F switches when inserting or removing a card.
Always hold the ECU300/ECU300-F by grasping the sides of the
card without touching any of the internal electronics or front
panel switches and connectors.
To install the ECU300/ECU300-F card:

1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the card’s
identification labels.
4. Insert the rear end of the ECU300/ECU300-F into the card guides.
5. Push the ECU300/ECU300-F in until it mates the chassis connectors and
the front of the card is flush with the front of the ADR-10000 shelf. If you
feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat
the procedure.
6. Secure the ECU300/ECU300-F in place by tightening the two captive
screws.

MXC300 Card
The ADR-10000 shelf always operates as redundant platforms, therefore each
shelf must be equipped with two MXC300 cards installed, one in slot MXC-A
(main card) and one in slot MXC-B (protection card).
Figure 5-3: Installing the MXC300
CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting an MXC300 into

the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the brown
locks outward first, then pull/push both handles
simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card.
To install the MXC300 card:

4. Press both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release
the handles.
5. Simultaneously push both handles forward.
6. Insert the rear end of the MXC300 card into the card guides.
7. If the NVM card was not installed in the MXC300, install it as follows:
a. Check that the NVM card has not been physically damaged during
shipment.

b. Remove the NVM from its antistatic protection packaging and perform
a visual inspection to detect damage during shipment. Report any
problems.
Figure 5-4: Installing the NVM in the MXC300
c. Orient the NVM card against the dedicated slot on the MXC300, and
then insert its rear end (the end with the connector) in the card guides.
Push the card in until it is locked in place.
NOTE: If the NVM lock is not properly fastened, there is no

access to read/write and the system emits an NVM “Cardout”
alarm.
d. Place the NVM cover on the slot, and fasten it with its two captive
screws.
8. Push the front panel of the MXC300 in until the extractor handles start to
move inside, the card mates the chassis connectors, and the front of the card
is flush with the front of the shelf. If you feel resistance before the
connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
9. Turn the two extractor handles simultaneously to the horizontal position to
lock the card in place.
10. Secure the MXC300 in place by tightening the two captive screws.
NOTE: Make sure that card is properly locked in place.

Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the shelf.
If the FAIL (red), MAIN (blue), and TMU (orange) LEDs
blink simultaneously, the MXC300 is not mounted correctly
or the extractor handles are not properly locked.

CAUTION: When replacing any MXC300 card:
The brown levers on the extractor handles operate
microswitches that indicate to the ADR-10000 platform that
the MXC300 card is installed. These levers must be pressed
first when replacing an MXC300.
WARNING:
To reset the system using the RESET button, you must
first remove the NVM cover.
To extract the NVM, press the release pushbutton using
the cover as a tool.
Quad I/O Cards

Quad I/O cards (SIM16_4 or SIM64_XFP) can be installed in two dedicated
slots (QA, QB) called quad slots (as they occupy the space of four I/O module
slots) in the ADR-10000. When quad I/O cards are not needed, these slots can
be utilized to install SIM16_1 modules by adding a mechanical adapter.
Figure 5-5: Installing a quad I/O card
NOTE: When quad I/O cards or SIM16_1 modules are not

installed in slots QA, QB, the openings must be covered with
blank panels to avoid cooling air escape and comply with
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

To install a quad I/O card:
CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting a quad I/O card

into the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the
brown locks outward first and then pull/push both handles
4. Push both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release the
handles.
5. Insert the rear end of the quad I/O card into the card guides.
6. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the
card is flush with the front of the ADR-10000 shelf. If you feel resistance
before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
7. Press both handles simultaneously to lock the card in place.
8. Secure the quad I/O card in place by tightening the two captive screws.
9. Install the SFP/XFP transceivers according to Installing SFP/XFP
transceivers in optical modules and cards (on page 5-15).

Installing SIM64_XFP Cards in Quad I/O
Slots
SIM64_XFP cards can also be installed in a quad of I/O slots (I1 to I4, I5 to I8,
I9 to I12, and I13 to I16). To do so you must prepare the quad I/O slots to
accommodate the card by removing the three I/O module guides between the
slots and attaching an adapter on both sides.
To prepare a quad I/O slots for SIM64_XFP installation:

1. Identify the quad I/O slots to be adapted for SIM64_XFP installation.
2. Identify the module guide to be removed, and remove the screw in front of
the guide.
3. Gently pull the module guide out.
Figure 5-6: Removing a module guide

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the two other module guides.
5. Identify the SIM64_XFP right adapter according to the following figure.
Figure 5-7: Installing the SIM64_XFP right adapter
6. Attach the adapter to the right side of the quad I/O slots with two screws
from the installation kit as shown in the figure above.
7. Identify the left card adapter according to the following figure.
Figure 5-8: Installing the SIM64_XFP left adapter
8. Attach the adapter to the left side of the quad I/O slots with two screws
from the installation kit as shown in the figure above.
To install a SIM64_XFP in a quad I/O slots:


4. Check that the quad I/O slots have been prepared to accommodate the
SIM64_XFP, as described in To prepare quad I/O slots for SIM64_XFP
installation (on page 5-8).
CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting a SIM64_XFP card

into the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the
brown locks outward first and then pull/push both handles
5. Push both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release the
handles.
6. Insert the rear end of the SIM64_XFP into the card guides.
Figure 5-9: Installing a SIM64_XFP in a quad I/O slot
7. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the
card is flush with the front of the ADR-10000 shelf. If you feel resistance
8. Press both handles simultaneously to lock the card in place.
9. Secure the SIM64_XFP in place by tightening the two captive screws.
10. Install the XFP transceiver according to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in
optical modules and cards (on page 5-15).
Installing ADR-10000 Modules

This section describes the installation process for all ADR-10000 modules. For
a list and technical description of all available modules, refer to the ADR-
10000 Reference Manual, General Description, and ADR Technical
Specifications.
The installation procedure for each type of module is as follows:
| Install I/O modules, including:

Optical and electrical modules (see Installing, Optical and Electrical I/O
Modules (on page 5-11))
OHU module (see Installing the OHU Module (on page 5-16))
Double-slot modules (see Installing Double-Slot Modules (on page 5-
17))
The optical I/O and optical aggregate modules use Small Form-factor Pluggable
(SFP) transceivers. The insertion of SFPs in the module slots is described in
Installing, Optical and Electrical I/O Modules (on page 5-11).
NOTE: You can install any combination of the different types

of I/O modules in the I/O modules cages.
Installing, Optical, and Electrical I/O

Modules
The following procedure can also be used to replace cards and modules in an
operating shelf, provided the general safety precautions listed in Work and
Equipment Safety and the module-specific warnings listed in the ADR-10000
Product Line Reference Manual for each module are strictly followed. Before
starting, make sure that all the I/O modules specified for installation in the
ADR-10000 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.
All I/O modules are installed in slots I1 through I16, as shown in the following
figure. In addition, if I/O cards are not installed in the wide slots (QA, QB), a
SIM16_1 module can be installed in each of these positions, by adding a
mechanical adapter. This section describes the installation of the electrical,
optical I/O modules, which are single-slot modules. The installation of
PIM2_63/B and MCSMs, which are double-slot modules, is described in
Installing Double-Slot Modules (on page 5-17).
In general, to facilitate easy cable routing, it is preferable to install all electrical
modules on the one side of the ADR-10000 shelf (left or right), and all optical
modules on the other side.
If you are employing a TPU 1:1 protection scheme, electrical modules that have
TPU protection should be arranged in pairs, one below the other. For 1:2 and
1:3 protection schemes, it is recommended that all electrical I/O modules be
installed on one side of the ADR-10000 shelf, in slots I1, I2, I5, and I6, or in
slots I3, I4, I7, and I8 in the upper module cage, and I9, I10, I13, and I14, or in
slots I11, I12, I15, and I16 in the lower module cage.
CAUTION:
When installing optical modules, make sure all SFP
transceiver slots are closed by protective caps. Do not
remove the cover until an SFP is inserted.
For your safety, to comply with electro-magnetic

compatibility (EMC) requirements and to prevent escape
of ventilation from the fans through these openings,
protect all unused slots with blank panels.
Figure 5-10: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O slots
To install an I/O electrical or optical module in the module

cages:
1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment,
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the module’s
4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the
corresponding module guides.
5. Push the module into the guides of the appropriate slot. Push slowly
backwards to mate the connectors until the front of the module is flush with
the front of the ADR-10000 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are
free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before
the connectors are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure.
CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully

align it with the cage guide rails. If you feel resistance during
insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat the
process.

Hold the module straight during insertion and removal. Pull
or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components
on adjacent modules.
6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws. Do
not use excessive torque when tightening the screws.
7. If you are installing an optical module with SFP transceivers, proceed to
Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical cards. (on page 5-15)
After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the module
insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all free slots.
Installing SIM16_1 modules in quad slots

The quad slots QA and QB can be adapted to accommodate one SIM16_1 each
by installing a mechanical adapter.
Figure 5-11: Installing the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter
To install the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter:

1. Check that the adapter has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the packaging bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the adapter from its protection packaging and perform a visual
inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Insert the rear end of the adapter into the card guides.

4. Push the adapter in until the front of it is flush with the front of the ADR-
10000 shelf. If you feel resistance before the adapter is in place, pull it out
and repeat the procedure.
5. Secure the adapter in place by tightening the two captive screws.
To install a SIM16_1 module in a quad slot:

1. Check that the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter is properly installed in the
corresponding quad slot.
2. Check that the SIM16_1 module has not been physically damaged during
shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is
sealed.
5. Insert the rear end of the SIM16_1 into the module guides in the
mechanical adapter.
6. Push the module into the guides of the appropriate slot. Push slowly
backwards to mate the connectors until the front of the module is flush with
the front of the adapter. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to
move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the
connectors are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure.
CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully

align it with the adapter guide rails. If you feel resistance
during insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat
the process.
Hold the module straight during insertion and removal. Pull
or push it slowly and carefully until it is in the correct
position.
7. Fasten the module to the adapter by tightening the two fastening screws. Do
not use excessive torque when tightening the screws.
8. Install the SFP transceiver according to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in
optical cards (on page 5-15).

Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical
modules and cards
CAUTION: During the installation of SFP/XFP transceivers

in optical and cards, make sure that all optical LC connectors
are closed by protective caps. Do not remove the covers until
an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector.
To install SFP/XFP transceivers in optical and cards:

1. Identify the prescribed position on the module according to the site
installation plan.
2. Check that the SFP/XFP has not been physically damaged during shipment,
3. Remove the SFP/XFP from its antistatic protection packaging and perform
a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
4. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the SFP/XFP
5. Remove the protective covers from the slot and from the SFP/XFP
transceiver.
6. Insert the rear end of the transceiver into the slot guides, and push slowly
backwards to mate the connectors until the transceiver clicks into place. If
you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated, retract the
transceiver and repeat the procedure.
Figure 5-12: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module
CAUTION: All slots that are not in use must remain covered. If
you have to replace a module or card, remove the SFP/XFP first.

Expanding a PIM2_21 I/O Slot to 42 E1s
An I/O slot that accommodates a PIM2_21 can be expanded to 42 E1s by
replacing it with a PIM2_42 and reassigning the slot as PIM2_42, through the
management.
Before you start:

Check that the items required for the expansion are available, including:
| PIM2_42 module
| Adapter cable between traffic cable connected to the PIM2_21 (that is
disconnected) and the connector on the PIM2_42
| Traffic cable for connecting the additional 21 E1s from the PIM2_42 and
the customer's DDF
To expand a PIM2_21 to 42 E1s:

1. Identify the PIM2_21 I/O slot to be expanded.
2. Disconnect the double SCSI connector from the PIM2_21.
3. Open the two captive screws, fastening the PIM2_21 to the ADR-10000,
and pull the module out.
4. Install the PIM2_42 in the slot of the removed module, as described in To
install an I/O electrical or optical module in the modules cage.
5. Connect the end of the adapter with the double SCSI connector to the traffic
cable removed from the PIM2_21 in step 2.
6. Connected the other end of the adapter cable with the 100-pin SCSI
connector to the upper connector on the PIM2_42 (marked 1-21).
7. Connect the traffic cable for the additional 21 E1s to the lower connector on
the PIM2_42 (marked 22-42). The other end of this cable is open, and
should be connected to the customer's DDF.
Installing the OHU module

The OHU installation is identical to the installation of I/O modules described in
To install an I/O electrical or optical module in the modules cage.

Installing Double-Slot Modules
Before you start:
Make sure that all the double-slot modules (PIM2_63s or MCSMs) specified
for installation in the ADR-10000 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation
plan, are available.
Figure 5-13: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the ADR-10000
Because the PIM 2_63s and MCSMs occupy a pair of slots each, before you
can install them you must first remove the guide between the pair of slots.
To remove a module guide from the lower row of slots:

1. Identify the module guide you are removing and remove the screw from the
front of the guide.
2. Gently pull the module guide out.
Figure 5-14: Removing the module guide

CAUTION: Do not allow the metal part you are removing to
touch any modules or other parts of the ADR-10000 cage.
This may cause a short-circuit and damage the modules.
To install a double-slot module in the modules cage:

4. Identify the assigned slot and insert the rear end of the module into the
5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the
module is flush with the front of the ADR-10000 shelf. Make sure the two
fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you
feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and
repeat the procedure.
6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws.
7. If you are installing MCSMs with SFP transceivers, proceed to Installing,
Optical and Electrical I/O Modules (on page 5-11).
NOTE: Only FE SFP transceivers can be inserted into FE

ports; you can insert either GbE SFP or FE SFP transceivers
into GbE/FE ports.
8. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all free slots.

Installing TPU Modules
This section provides instructions for:
| Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU Shelf (on page 5-19)
| Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-20)
| Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU (on page 5-21)
| Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-22)
| Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-24)
Before you start:

| Make sure that the TC/TCF module and all the TPMs specified for
installation in the ADR-10000 shelf in accordance with the shelf
installation plan are available.
Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU

Shelf
The TC/TCF module is installed in the right slot of the TPU.
Figure 5-15: Inserting the TC module (ADR-10000)

To install a TC/TCF module in the TPU:
corresponding TC/TCF module guides.
fastening screws are free to move backward as the TC/TCF module slides
in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module
out and repeat the procedure.
Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of single-slot (1:1 protection) modules.
The installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules is described in
Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-22).
Figure 5-16: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR-10000)

To install a single-slot TPM in the TPU:
7. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.
Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU
NOTE: When optical amplifiers are installed in the TPU, you

must install a TCF to allow sufficient cooling air flow
through the amplifiers. The management system will block
the configuration of optical amplifiers, if a TCF is not
installed.
The installation of optical amplifiers in the TPU is identical to the installation

of a single-slot TPM in the TPU, as described in Installing Single-Slot TPMs in
the TPU (on page 5-20).

Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU
This section describes the installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules.
Double-slot modules can be placed in slot pairs TPM1 and TPM2 or TPM3 and
TPM4. Before you can install a double-slot TPM, you must first remove the
module guide between the two slots.
Figure 5-17: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR-10000)
To remove a TPM guide:

1. Identify the module guide you are removing.
2. Remove the two uppermost screws and the two lowest screws from the
front of the TPM guide.
3. Gently pull the TPM guide out.
Figure 5-18: Removing a TPM guide

To install a double-slot TPM in the TPU:
7. After inserting all modules, check for correct installation against the module
insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.

Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU
This section describes the installation of triple-slot (1:2 protection) modules,
which are accommodated in slots TPM1, TPM2, and TPM3 (slot TPM4
remains free).
Before you start:

1. Before installing a triple-slot TPM, remove the two module guides between
the three slots. See To remove a TPM guide (on page 5-22).
2. Make sure that all the TPMs specified for installation in the ADR-10000 in
accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.
Figure 5-19: Inserting a triple-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR-10000)
To install a triple-slot TPM in the TPU:


7. After inserting the modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.
Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR-

10000 Shelf
The ADR-10000 shelf can be expanded with one or two TPU expansion
shelves.
The TPU can be attached on top of the ADR-10000 and/or directly under it.
Alternatively, a single OCU expansion shelf can be attached directly on top of
the ADR-10000 or on top of a TPU that is installed on the ADR-10000.
NOTE: The OCU cannot be installed under the ADR-10000

shelf.
When you order an ADR-10000 system with one or two TPUs, the shelf is
supplied with the TPUs installed and their fastening brackets attached to each
one. The same applies to OCU shelves.
If your ADR-10000 shelf does not include TPU protection, it is possible to
upgrade your system and add one or two TPUs and an OCU at a later stage,
provided you have left space on the rack for this possibility. You need at least
150 mm space above/under the ADR-10000 for each TPU/OCU.
The TPUs can be installed without disconnecting any of the ADR-10000 cables
and fibers and without affecting traffic not going via a TPU.
CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by an

SAGEMCOM trained field engineer.

Installing a TPU/OCU on the ADR-10000
shelf
The following section describes the procedure for installing a TPU/OCU on top
of an ADR-10000 shelf.
To install a TPU on top of the ADR-10000 shelf:

1. Check that the TPU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
2. Remove the shelf from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelf’s
4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the ADR-10000 so that they will
not unintentionally be disconnected when the TPU is inserted on the rack.
5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU connector in
place (located at the back right corner, on the top of the ADR-10000 shelf).
Remove the cover.
Figure 5-20: Removing the TPU connector from the ADR-10000

6. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the
ADR-10000 shelf.
Figure 5-21: Inserting the TPU connector onto the ADR-10000
7. Orient the TPU upside down, on a clean flat surface.

8. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides on the bottom of the TPU.
9. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely into
the TPU.
Figure 5-22: Installing the pin guides in the TPU

10. Turn the TPU back to normal position.
11. Carefully lower the TPU onto the ADR-10000 shelf, taking care that the pin
guides are inserted into the slots as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-23: Lowering the TPU onto the ADR-10000
12. Insert the three long screws, supplied with the installation kit, into the
appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the TPU
in place.
Figure 5-24: Securing the TPU onto the ADR-10000
13. Insert the TC module in the TPU, as described in Installing the TC/TCF
Module in the TPU Shelf (on page 5-19).
14. Insert the TPMs in the TPU, as described in Installing Single-Slot TPMs in
the TPU (on page 5-20) and Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on
page 5-22).

15. If the I/O modules to be protected by the TPU are already connected to
traffic cables, disconnect them.
16. Connect the TPMs to the relevant I/O modules, as described in Installing
TPU Modules (on page 5-19).
CAUTION: Insert/extract the TPU in/from an ADR-10000

only when it is empty (no TC/TCF or TPMs are assembled in
it).
Installing a TPU under the ADR-10000 Shelf

The following section describes the procedure for installing a TPU under an
ADR-10000 shelf.
To install a TPU under the ADR-10000 shelf:

1. Check that the TPU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelf’s
4. Turn the ADR-10000 shelf so that its rear faces the front.
5. Lift the ADR-10000 on its far lower edge to gain access to the bottom
surface, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-25: Installing the ADR-10000 pin guides and removing the lower
connector cover
6. Open the two captive screws fastening the lower TPU connector cover to
the shelf. Remove the cover.

7. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides at the bottom of the shelf
(see the figure above).
8. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely in
place.
ADR-10000 shelf (see installation of the H-connector in Inserting the TPU
connector onto the ADR-10000 (on page 5-27)). Note that the connector
should be installed with the angled corner facing backwards.
10. Open the two screws securing the TPU connector cover (located at the back
right corner, on top of the TPU). Remove the cover.
11. Open the six screws securing the fastening bracket to the TPU shelf (keep
the screws handy). Remove the bracket.
12. Orient the TPU on a clean flat surface, upside down.
13. Place the TPU's fastening bracket (removed in step 12) on the TPU and
attach it with the six screws.
Figure 5-26: Assembling the TPU bracket and jumper connector
14. Open the two captive screws fastening the second connector cover to the
TPU. Remove the cover.
15. Take the jumper connector from the installation kit and insert it into the
connector house.
16. Fasten the jumper connector in place with three screws from the installation
kit.
17. Turn the TPU back to regular position.

18. Carefully lower the ADR-10000 shelf onto the TPU, taking care that the pin
guides are inserted into the slots, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-27: Lowering the ADR-10000 onto the TPU
19. Insert the three long screws supplied in the installation kit into the
appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the TPU
in place.
Figure 5-28: Securing the lower TPU to the shelf

Adding a Second TPU/OCU
If your ADR-10000 already has a TPU/OCU, it is possible to upgrade your
system and add an additional TPU/OCU cage on top of the first, provided you
have left space on the rack for this possibility. There should be a space of at
least 150 mm above the expanded ADR-10000 for installing the TPU/OCU.
The second TPU/OCU cage can be installed without disconnecting any of the
expanded ADR-10000 system cables and fibers, and without affecting traffic
that is not going via the TPU/OCU.
CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by an

SAGEMCOM trained field engineer.
To install an additional TPU/OCU on the expanded ADR-

10000 shelf:
1. Check that the additional TPU/OCU has not been physically damaged
during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original
packaging is sealed.
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelf
4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the expanded ADR-10000 so that
they will not unintentionally be disconnected when the additional
TPU/OCU is inserted on the rack.

5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU/OCU
connector in place (located at the back right corner on the top of the first
TPU/OCU shelf, as shown in the following figure). Remove the cover.
Figure 5-29: Removing the connector cover and fastening bracket from the
first TPU/OCU
6. Open the six screws securing the fastening bracket to the first TPU/OCU
shelf installed on the expanded ADR-10000 (see the previous figure).
7. Open the two screws fastening the bracket to the rack. Remove the bracket.
8. Orient the second TPU upside down, on a clean flat surface.
9. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides at the bottom of the
second TPU.
10. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely into
the TPU.
Figure 5-30: Installing the pin guides in the TPU

first TPU/OCU shelf, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-31: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector onto the first TPU/OCU in the
ADR-10000

12. Carefully lower the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR-10000 (on
the first TPU/OCU shelf), taking care that the pin guides are inserted into
the slots as illustrated in the following figure.
Expanded
ADR-10000
Figure 5-32: Lowering the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR-10000
13. Insert the three long screws supplied in the installation kit into the
appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the
second TPU/OCU in place.
Figure 5-33: Securing the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR-10000

6
Optical Fiber and Cable
Installation and Routing
In this chapter:
Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks .............................................6-1
Connecting Fibers and Cables in

ETSI A Racks
In general, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, and data
cables should be routed along the sides of the rack. All optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A
rack. Traffic cables from the lower part of the ADR-10000 shelf (lower module
cage and lower TPU) should be routed through the cable guide, and the surplus
folded on the cable slack tray.

Figure 6-1: Routing cables and fibers in an ETSI A rack

Connecting Power Cables
The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
MXC300 cards.
To connect power cables:
NOTE: To facilitate power cables routing, it is recommended

to start from the ADR-10000 shelf towards the RAP.
1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the POWER
connector of the MXC300 in slot MXC-A, and fasten it with its two screws.
2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable, and thread it
through the opening in the left bracket of the ADR-10000 shelf.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the
corresponding MXC300 in slot MXC-B.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the side cable guides of the rack.
Pull the cables until the cable connectors are positioned against the
appropriate connectors on the RAP.
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
6. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the RAP.
CAUTION: Do not extract/insert an MXC300 card while the

DC cables are connected to it.
Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
ECU300/ECU300-F front panel.
To connect alarm cables:

1. Route the alarm cables leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to
the appropriate ADR-10000 shelf (see "Connecting Fibers and Cables in
ETSI A Racks" on page 6-1).
2. Pull each cable down to level of the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F and

bend it until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate alarm
connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F.
3. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.

4. Connect the free ends of the cables in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags, to the ALARMS connector on the
ECU300/ECU300-F front panel.
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules

and Cards
All optical fibers in the ADR-10000 shelf are connected to the LC connectors
on the SFP/XFP transceivers.
Before you start:

Before installing the ADR-10000 shelf and modules, all optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of SAGEMCOM’s
recommended rack. From the conduits, the fibers should be routed into the
FSTs installed above and under (in horizontal installations) the ADR-10000
shelf you are installing and threaded into the FST, as described in Installing the
FST (on page 3-70).

characteristics.
To connect an optical fiber to an ADR-10000 module/card:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. If you cannot release the
fiber in the halfway position, pull the tray again to open it
fully.
3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running
along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level.
4. At the desired level lead the end through the appropriate slot of the conduit,
and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide.

5. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated
module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
7. Remove the cover from the module/card connector, and connect the fiber
connector to the module/card connector.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for all optical modules/cards in the ADR-10000
shelf.
9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules/cards, gently
push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.
Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface

Cables to Electrical Modules
NOTE: The procedures in this section describe the

connection of traffic cables directly to I/O modules in the
ADR-10000 shelf. If your installation includes a TPU
protection scheme, some of the cables will be connected to
the relevant TPM in the TPU instead of to the I/O module,
according to the site installation plan.
Connection of the I/O modules to the TPMs is described in
Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the TPU (on page 6-
14).

Routing and connecting multipair cables
Multipair cables are used to connect to the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces
located on the PIM2_21 and PIM2_63 electrical connection modules. One or
three pairs of cables are connected to the module, respectively.
Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or
receive). The cable end connecting to the ADR-10000 shelf is terminated in 2 x
50-pin SCSI male connectors.
If you are using an xDDF-21 patch panel, suitable cables should be routed from
the relevant xDDF-21 patch panel to the ADR-10000 shelf location. Sufficient
length should be available to permit routing. Note that the cable must be
connected to the rear of the patch panel before it is secured in place.
To connect multipair cables:

1. Arrange the multipair traffic cables and route them through the cable guides
attached to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each multipair cable down to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
3. Leave a spare length of 20 cm to 30 cm of cable folded on top of the shelf
(for modules in the upper module cage) or on the cable slack tray (for
modules in the lower module cage) for future maintenance purposes.
4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening of the cable guide serving the shelf, until
the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate slot. Use cable ties
as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
5. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate module connectors with the
appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length if necessary.
6. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding module.
CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to

secure the cable connector, as this may damage the module.
7. Secure the cable connector to the module connector with the two cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually; if the screws cannot be
reached with your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N cm.

Installing an xDDF-21 patch panel
The xDDF-21 is installed above the ADR-10000 shelf accessories.
To install an xDDF-21 patch panel:

1. Route the 2 x 50-pin SCSI cables leading from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63/B
along the side of the rack to the location where the xDDF-21 patch panel
will be installed.
2. Before you install the patch panel, connect the SCSI cables leading to the
rear of the xDDF-21 patch panel. The cables are marked J1 and J2 and
should be connected to their respective connectors.
3. Leaving at least 100 mm free space above the ADR-10000 shelf accessories
and below the xDDF-21, attach the patch panel to the rack rails and secure,
using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts.
4. Connect the traffic cables to the front of the xDDF-21 patch panel, and
make a note of the appropriate channels on the identification label on the
inside of the panel door.
Routing and connecting coaxial cables

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on
PIM345_3, and SIM1_4/E modules. Depending on the module type, a
maximum of eight cables can be connected to each module.
As part of site preparations, suitable cables should be routed from the relevant
High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended rack location, and connected to the
coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors supplied with the ADR-10000
shelf. Sufficient length should be available to permit routing the cables to the
appropriate level in the rack.
To connect coaxial traffic cables to an ADR-10000 module:

1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in groups
according to the designated module, and route them along the guides at the
side of the rack to the appropriate ADR-10000 unit.
2. Pull each coaxial cable up or down to the level of the corresponding
electrical connection module.
the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is positioned at
the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required to fasten the
cable to the rack side rails.
5. Cut excess cable length if necessary.
6. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding
electrical connection connector on the module.

Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the
ADR-10000
The optional TPU shelf can be mounted on top and/or under the ADR-10000
shelf to add I/O protection capability to the platform.
Each Tributary Protection Module (TPM) is connected to both operating and
protection I/O modules in the ADR-10000 shelf.
If a failure is detected in one of the operating I/O modules, the TC module in
the TPU switches the traffic from the operating I/O module to the protection
module.
The TPU has four slots for TPMs. The modules are connected to the main and
protection I/O modules by traffic cables, and the client's traffic is connected
directly to the TPMs.
TPMs support the electrical PIMs and SIMs with the following protection
schemes:
| TPMs for a 1:1 protection scheme, where one protection module is
connected to a single I/O module
connected to one or two I/O modules
connected to two or three I/O modules
The TPU connects to a connector on top of the ADR-10000 shelf. Similarly the
lower TPU connects to a connector at the bottom of the shelf. These connectors
provide the power and control buses required for the TPU operation.
The modules in the TPU are distributed as follows:
| The rightmost TPU slot is allocated for the TC module. The TC module is
described in the ADR-10000 Product Line Reference Manual.
| The other four slots are used for any combination of TPMs (single slot,
double-slot, or triple-slot modules are supported).
The TPMs available for the I/O protection are:
| TPM2_1
| TPM2_3
| TPM2_42_2
| TPM2_63_2
| TPMH_1
Each TPM is dedicated for protection of a specific traffic rate and protection
scheme. The TPM name designates the protected traffic rate and the protection
scheme, as follows:
| The first digit after the name designates the traffic rate.
| The last digit after the underscore designates the protection scheme.

For example, the TPM2_3 is a module for 2 Mbps traffic, and supports a
protection scheme of 1:3.
Similarly TPMH_1 is a module for High rate traffic (including 34/45 Mbps and
155 Mbps), and a protection scheme of 1:1.
The following table summarizes the available TPMs, the type of I/O modules
they protect, the traffic rate, and the protection scheme.
Table 6-1: ADR-10000 protection schemes
TPM Type Protected I/O Traffic rate Protection scheme
module
TPM2_1 PIM2_21 2 Mbps 1:1
TPM2_3 PIM2_21 2 Mbps 1:3
TPM2_42_2 PIM2_42 2 Mbps 1:2
TPM2_63_2 PIM2_63/B, 2 Mbps 1:2
PIM2_42
TPMH_1 PIM345, 34/45 Mbps, 155 Mbps 1:1
SIM1_4/E,
SIM1_8
In the specific ADR-10000 protection schemes, the location of the protection

module (P) and the protected module (M) is allocated by the system's
management software. Therefore the I/O modules must be installed in the
allocated slots, and connected to the corresponding TPMs.
The following sections provide schematic diagrams and tables for the
connections of the ADR-10000 shelf in the various protection schemes.

ADR-10000 1:1 protection scheme
connections
The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:1 protection scheme for
an ADR-10000 populated with PIM2_21 modules in the upper and lower
module cages and TPM2_1 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking
P in the ADR-10000 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main
(working) module.
Figure 6-2: ADR-10000 1:1 protection scheme example
The following table shows the slot association for 1:1 protection scheme in the
ADR-10000.
Table 6-2: ADR-10000 1:1 I/O protection
TPU slots I/O slot allocation
Protection Main
M1-1 I1 I5
M1-2 I2 I6
M1-3 I3 I7
M1-4 I4 I8
M3-1 I9 I13
M3-2 I10 I14
M3-3 I11 I15
M3-4 I12 I16

connections
module cages and TPM2_63_2 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The
marking P in the ADR-10000 shelf designates the Protection module, and M
the Main (working) module.
ADR-10000.
Protection Main
M1-1, M1-2, and I1 and I2 I5 and I6
M1-3 I7 and I8
M3-1, M3-2, and I9 and I10 I13 and I14
M3-3 I15 and I16

connections
module cages and TPM2_3 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking
P in the ADR-10000 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main
(working) module.
ADR-10000.
Protection Main
M1-1 and M1-2 I1 I2, I5, I6
M1-3 and M1-4 I3 I4, I7, I8
M3-1 and M3-2 I9 I10, I13, I14
M3-3 and M3-4 I11 I12, I15, I16

TPM2_42_2 Protection Assignment for the
ADR-10000
The TPM2_42_2 supports four protection groups of two PIM2_42 cards
protected in each.
Figure 6-5: TPM2_42_2 protection slot allocation in ADR-10000
The following table describes the slot assignment of the TPM2_42_2 in the
TPU and the PIM2_42 in the ADR-10000 shelf.
Table 6-5: TPM2_42_2 and PIM2_42 slot assignment in the ADR-10000
TPU slots I/O Slot Allocation
Protection Main
M1-1 and M1-2 I1 I5 and I6
M1-3 and M1-4 I3 I7 and I8
M3-1 and M3-2 I9 I13 and I14
M3-3 and M3-4 I11 I15 and I16

Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the
TPU
The type of cable used to connect the I/O modules to the TPMs depends on the
type of I/O module being protected, as follows:
| For PIM2_21s, 2 x 50 to 1 x 100 SCSI cables are supplied, to be connected
from four different PIM2_21s to connectors PIM2_21 #1, PIM2_21 #2,
PIM2_21 #3, and PIM2_21 PROTECT at the bottom of the TPM2_3.
Multipair traffic cables are connected to the DDF#1, DDF#2, and DDF#3
connectors at the top of the TPM2_3.
The connection between TPM2_3s and PIM2_21s is shown in the following
figure.
Connections are between a connector in the TPM and the corresponding
module in the shelf, where “P” denotes protection and 1, 2, and 3 are for
reference purposes.
| For PIM345_3 or SIM1_4/E modules, the supplied cables enable

connection from the DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors on the I/O module to the 8W8
MAIN and PROTECT connectors at the bottom of the TPM-H_1. The
traffic coaxial cables are connected to the OUT/IN connectors at the top of
the TPM-H_1. These connections are shown in the following figure.

NOTE: The cable used to connect the PIM345_3 or
SIM1_4/E to the TPM-H_1 ends with eight coaxial cables:
When protecting a PIM345_3, six coaxial cables are
connected and two remain unused.
When protecting a SIM1_4/E, all eight coaxial cables are
connected.
Figure 6-7: Connecting to a TPMH_1 protection with an ADR-10000

The following figure shows connection to 252 E1s with 1:2 protection. Six
PIM2_63 modules are connected in the ADR-10000 shelf protected by two
TPM2_63_2 modules in the TPUs.
Figure 6-8: ADR-10000 with 252 E1s in 1:2 protection connections

Routing and Connecting Cables to Data
Modules (EISMBs/DIOMs/MCSMs)
Depending on the data module in your ADR-10000 shelf, data cables with RJ45
connectors or optical fibers with LC connectors are used to connect to the
module, as described in the following procedures.
To connect RJ45 data cables to a data module:

1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the data cables in groups
according to the designated data module, and route them along the guides at
the side of the rack to the appropriate ADR-10000 unit.
2. Pull each data cable up or down to the level of the corresponding data
module.
through the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is
positioned at the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required
to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
5. Connect the RJ-45 connector on the cable to the corresponding connector
on the data module.
Connecting an optical fiber to a data module

The following procedure describes how to connect an optical fiber to a data
module.
Before you start:

Prior to installing the ADR-10000 shelf and modules, route all optical fibers
through the conduits running along the front supports of the ADR-10000’s
recommended rack. From the conduits, route the fibers into the FST above the
ADR-10000 shelf you are installing and thread them into the FST, as described
in Installing the FST (on page 3-70).

characteristics.

To connect an optical fiber to a data module:
1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.
3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running
along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level.
4. At the desired level, lead the end through the appropriate slot of the
conduit, and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide.
5. Thread the end of the fiber through the rack slots to the SFP transceiver LC
connector on the designated data module. Leave some slack to prevent
stress.
6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
7. Remove the cover from the SFP transceiver, and connect the fiber
connector to the SFP connector.
8. Repeat Steps 2 to 7 for all optical data modules in the ADR-10000 shelf.
9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules, gently push the
FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

Timing cables are connected to the T3 and T4 connectors of the
ECU300/ECU300-F. Each cable is terminated in a 9-pin D-type female
connector.
To connect a timing cable to the ADR-10000 shelf:

1. Route the timing cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate ADR-
10000 shelf.
2. Pull each cable down to the level of the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F
and bend it until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate
timing connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F.
3. Connect the free ends of the cables in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags, to connectors T3 and T4 on the
ECU300/ECU300-F.

secure the cable connector, as this may damage the
ECU300/ECU300-F.
4. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.

5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.
Connecting Management Cables

The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated
MANAGEMENT MAIN and PROT/LCT on the ECU300/ECU300-F. Each
cable is terminated in an RJ-45 plug.
The cable from the management station must be plugged into the
MANAGMENT MAIN connector in the ECU300 or ECU300-F card.
If more than one shelf has to be connected to the management, a daisy chain
interconnection is used to distribute management to the shelves for either
ECU300 or ECU300-F cards. In this configuration, the cable from the
management station is connected to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of
the first shelf, the PROT/LCT connector of the first shelf is connected to the
MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the second shelf, and so on.
To connect management cables to the ADR-10000 shelf

equipped with an ECU300/ECU300-F:
1. Route the management cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate
ADR-10000 shelf.
2. Pull each cable down to the level of the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F
and bend it until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate
timing connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F.
3. Connect the management station cable to the MANAGEMENT MAIN
connector of the first shelf, in accordance with the rack installation plan and
the cable tags.
4. If more than one shelf is installed, connect a management cable from the
PROT/LCT connector of the first shelf to the MANAGEMENT MAIN
connector of the second shelf, and so on.
5. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.

secure the cable connector, as this may damage the
ECU300/ECU300-F.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the shelves.
Tool Kit
SAGEMCOM offers a tool kit to facilitate extraction/insertion of connectors
and optical SFP transceivers connected to ports in very high density cabling
environments.

The tool kit is packed in a compact box and enables the technical staff to handle
installation and maintenance activities in a quick and efficient fashion, without
affecting traffic of a neighbouring connector that should not be removed.
The kit includes the following tools:
| RJ-45 extractor
| LC connector extraction/insertion and optical SFP extractor (all in the same
tool)
| DIN 1.0/2.3 (regular and small profile) connector extractor
| Pincers
Extracting RJ-45 connectors

The RJ-45 extractor tool enables easy extraction of RJ-45 connectors located in
very high density cabling environments. The extractor is designed to remove
connectors connected to modules that include one or two rows of data ports (for
example, DIOM_08 and MCSM modules).
The general view of the tool is shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-9: RJ-45 extractor

To extract an RJ-45 connector from an upper port row:
1. Insert the cables (or cable) into the extractor as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-10: Inserting the cables (upper row)
2. Move extractor forward to attach the far groove to the module's handle.
Figure 6-11: Attaching the extractor to the handle (upper row)
3. Press the extractor's bent edge on the connector's protrusion.

4. Hold the cable near the connector to be extracted and pull the connector
out.
Figure 6-12: Extracting the connector (upper row)
To extract an RJ-45 connector from a lower port row:

1. Insert the cables (or cable) into the extractor as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-13: Inserting the cables (lower row)

2. Move extractor forward to attach the near groove to the module's handle.
Figure 6-14: Attaching the extractor to the handle (lower row)
3. Press the extractor's bent edge on the connector's protrusion.

4. Hold the cable near the connector to be extracted and pull the connector
out.
Figure 6-15: Extracting the connector (lower row)

Extracting/Inserting LC connectors and
SFPs
The LC/SFP extractor is a multipurpose tool enabling the extraction/insertion of
LC connectors connected in very high density cabling environments (for
example, LC connectors cabled near multiple adjacent SFPs). The tool is also
designed to extract SFP transceivers.
The following figure shows the LC/SFP extractor.
Figure 6-16: LC/SFP extractor
Before you start:

Identify the LC/SFP extractor according to LC/SFP extractor (on page 6-24).
Fold the SFP extractor lever into the tool's narrow end. Use the tool's wide end
to perform the following procedure.
To extract an LC connector:
1. Insert the fiber near the boot under the extractor's wide end tab.
Figure 6-17: Inserting the fiber into the extractor

2. Push the extractor straight forward and press its release tab onto the SFP's
clip, until it clicks over top of the clip.
Figure 6-18: Pressing extractor's release tab onto SFP's clip
3. Pull out the extractor with the fiber.
Figure 6-19: Extracting the LC connector
4. Move the fiber backward till its connector is beyond the extractor's tab.
Figure 6-20: Moving the connector beyond the tab

5. Remove the fiber from the extractor.
Figure 6-21: Removing the fiber
Before you start:

Fold the SFP extractor lever into tool's wide end. Use the tool's narrow end to
perform the following procedure.
To insert an LC connector:
1. Insert the fiber near its boot, under the extractor's narrow end tab. Orient
connector's clip in front of the tool's teeth.
Figure 6-22: Inserting the fiber into extractor's narrow end
2. Push the extractor forward until stopped by the connector's clip.
Figure 6-23: Moving extractor's end to the connector

3. Insert the connector into the SFP until it locks.
Figure 6-24: Inserting the connector into the SFP
4. Gently pull the extractor back until its edge is beyond the boot.
Figure 6-25: Moving the extractor backward
5. Remove the extractor from the fiber near the boot.
Figure 6-26: Removing the extractor from the fiber
Before you start:

Fold the SFP extractor lever into the tool's narrow end. Use the tool's narrow
side to perform the following procedure.

To extract an SFP transceiver:
1. Orient the extractor in front of the SFP.
Figure 6-27: Orienting the extractor in front of the SFP
2. Push the extractor forward until stopped by the SFP.
Figure 6-28: Moving the extractor forward
3. Push the extractor forward to fit SFP's middle partition into extractor's edge
slot.
Figure 6-29: Fitting SFP's partition into extractor's slot

4. Move the extractor's teeth to the right (toward the SFP clip).
Figure 6-30: Moving extractor toward SFP clip
5. Pull the extractor slightly backward. Make sure that the clip is grasped and
moves with the tool.
Figure 6-31: Pulling the extractor backward with grasped clip
6. Slide the lever forward to lock the SFP's clip, and press slightly.
Figure 6-32: Locking the clip between lever and extractor's teeth

7. With the clip locked, pull the extractor backward to rotate the clip by` 90°,
and release the SFP from its housing.
Figure 6-33: Releasing the SFP from housing
8. Gently pull the SFP and extract it from the housing.
Figure 6-34: Extracting the SFP
NOTE: It is very important to keep the SFPs locked during

the last three steps of the procedure.
Extracting/Inserting DIN 1.0/2.3 coaxial

connectors
The DIN 1.0/2.3 connector extractor tool enables the extraction/insertion of
coaxial connectors connected in very high density cabling environments (for
example, coaxial connectors cabled near multiple adjacent electrical SFPs).

The following figure identifies the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector extractor.
Figure 6-35: DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor
Before you start:

Identify the coaxial extractor according to DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor (on page 6-31).
Use the tool's narrow end to perform the following procedure.
To extract a DIN1.0/2.3 connector:

1. Place the extractor on the coaxial cable in front of the connector.
Figure 6-36: Placing the extractor in front of the connector

2. Push the extractor forward and attach the end tabs on the connector's step.
Figure 6-37: Attaching the extractor to the connector's step
3. Pull the extractor with the connector backward and release the connector.
Figure 6-38: Extracting the connector
Before you start:

Identify the coaxial extractor according to DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor (on page 6-31).
Use the tool's wide end to perform the following procedure.

To insert a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector:
1. Insert the coaxial cable near its boot, under the extractor's wide end tab.
Figure 6-39: Inserting the coaxial cable into the extractor
2. Pull the cable backward until the connector's edge is stopped by the tab.
Figure 6-40: Positioning the connector in the extractor

3. Push the extractor with the connector forward until it clicks into the SFP.
Figure 6-41: Inserting the connector
4. Gently pull the extractor backward and release it from the cable.
Figure 6-42: Removing the extractor

7
Commissioning Tests
In this chapter:
Overview..........................................................................................................7-1
Test Equipment ................................................................................................7-2
Site Commissioning Tests ...............................................................................7-3
Network Commissioning Tests........................................................................7-6
Overview
The commissioning tests are performed after completing the installation and
preliminary configuration of a new network. These procedures confirm that the
network has been properly installed and is operating in accordance with the
design specifications.
This chapter provides general commissioning procedures for the ADR-10000,
and provides a basis for preparing tests in specific networks.
The commissioning procedures include:
| Site commissioning tests, performed at the site level to ensure proper
functionality of the site.
| Network commissioning tests, performed at the network level. These
include:
SDH commissioning tests, to ensure proper SDH functionality of the
integrated network
Data network commissioning tests, to ensure proper data functionality
of the integrated network
Optical network commissioning tests, to ensure proper optical
functionality of the integrated network

The commissioning procedures presented in this chapter include:
| Test Equipment
| Site Commissioning Tests (on page 7-3)
| Network Commissioning Tests (on page 7-6)
| SDH Commissioning Tests (on page 7-6)
| Data Network Commissioning Tests (on page 7-17)
| Optical Network Commissioning Tests (on page 7-21)
NOTES: Personnel involved in the execution and supervision

of commissioning tests must be familiar with the applicable
safety precautions and requirements.
Unless otherwise indicated, the tests described in these
sections apply to all ADR shelves and to both SDH.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning procedures:
| Optical power meter (OPM)
| Optical spectrum analyzer (recommended for measurements at points
carrying multiple wavelengths, for example, inputs and outputs of optical
amplifiers)
| Optical BER tester
| Set of optical attenuators with various values
| Variable optical attenuator
| FC-to-LC and FC-to-SC adapters
| FC/FC optical patch cords
| Multimeter
Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers, and
therefore no specific test equipment models are listed. You can use any
equipment that meets the applicable international standards and has satisfactory
measurement accuracy over the range of operating parameters and
environmental conditions that apply to the specific network. If necessary,
contact SAGEMCOM's Field Engineering Department for specific
recommendations.

Site Commissioning Tests
The site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of ADR-10000
network elements. Perform the following procedures on each network element
at each site:
| Verification of cards and modules installed in each shelf
| Visual inspection and mechanical checks
| Optical level measurements (see reference data in the ADR-10000 System
Specifications manual)
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in

Each Shelf
This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have
been installed in each site, and to record their firmware versions and serial
numbers.
The following table provides a typical form for recording the cards and
modules installed in an ADR-10000 shelf.
Table 7-1: Card and module inventory
Card/Module type Slot Boot version Serial number
NOTES: Make sure that the boot version of each card and
module matches the embedded version.
If the equipment is already connected to a management
station, use the Inventory window to collect the information
and print the relevant data. Refer to the SAGEMCOM
management system user manual for detailed instructions.

Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks
The visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing
and connection of cables, and other tasks related to equipment installation.
Refer to:
| Equipment Installation (see "Platform Installation" on page 4-1) – criteria
for proper equipment installation
| Site cabling diagram – criteria for proper cabling routing
After completing the visual inspection tasks (items 1 to 9 in table Visual
inspection and mechanical checks (on page 7-4)), power on the ADR-10000
shelves to perform an additional set of acceptance tests (items 10 to 13 in table
Visual inspection and mechanical checks (on page 7-4)). These tests check the
functions needed for continuing the execution of the network commissioning
tests. Refer to the ADR-10000 Product Line Reference Manual for a description
of the various card indicators and their functions.
The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual
inspection and mechanical check.
Table 7-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks
No. Description of inspection/check Results
1. Check mechanical mounting of the rack.
2. Install the DC power cable (main fuse to RAP; RAP
fuse to shelf).
3. Ground the cable connections.
4. Install the DDF and connect the cables.
5. Install the ODF and connect the cables.
6. Install the network manager station (if applicable).
7. Unpack the cards and insert them into the shelves.
8. Provide DC supply voltage via the first DC source to ___V
the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).
9. Provide DC supply voltage via the second DC source to ___V
the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).
10. Power on the shelves.
11. Check the proper operation of both RAP power sources
by disconnecting one source at a time.
12. Check the communication between the shelf and the
Craft terminal via the shelf SLIP interface.
13. Check the proper operation of all FCU300s.
14. Check LED operation by pressing the LED TEST
pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F.
15. Check slot assignment for all relevant cards.
16. Check that there are no abnormal alarms.

Measuring Optical Levels
These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports.
Before performing any other commissioning test, proper optical levels, within
the limits specified in the ADR-10000 System Specifications, must be achieved
for each optical component.
Perform these measurements using an Optical Power Meter (OPM) configured
according to the wavelength at the measurement port. For reliable
measurement, do not connect the OPM directly to a port but use a 6.6 foot /
2-meter cable. When measuring high optical power levels, use attenuators to
ensure that the power does not exceed the maximum OPM input level.
The following table provides a typical data form for recording the results of the
optical level measurements.
Table 7-3: Measured optical levels
Slot Module Port Wavelength Optical transmit Receive level
type level (dBm) (dBm)
The measured power levels are evaluated as follows:

| The measured power must be within the range of minimum and maximum
levels specified in the ADR-10000 System Specifications for the
transceiver plug-in type installed on the corresponding port.
| The measured power must be within the expected range according to the
optical network plan.
If necessary, contact SAGEMCOM's Field Engineering Department for
relevant port and optical transceiver plug-in specifications and network
planning data. An OK result means that the port meets both criteria.
It is usually sufficient to measure only the optical levels at the transmit and
receive ports of I/O cards, transponders, and optical amplifiers installed in each
shelf. A good port receive level indicates that the components in the optical
path up to that port are properly connected and operating normally. If the result
is not satisfactory, perform additional measurements at all the other ports along
the optical signal paths.
Shelf Power-On Test Procedure

This procedure checks the equipment recovery capability after a power fault.

To power on the NE:
1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the shelf.
2. Turn the shelf circuit breaker off.
3. After 30 seconds, turn the shelf circuit breaker on.
The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without user
intervention and without any abnormal alarms in the system.
Network Commissioning Tests

SDH Commissioning Tests
These commissioning tests check that SDH functionality is in accordance with
the system specifications.
Test equipment setup

The SDH tests are performed using a PDH analyzer, optical power meter, and
variable attenuators. Configure the optical power meter according to the
measured wavelength.
The test conditions for the various interfaces are described in the following
sections.
2 Mbps tests
For 2 Mbps tributaries, configure the test equipment as follows:
Framing Unframed
Coding HDB3
Pattern 2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate 2 Mbps
Timing Received clock
Inject error Code error
34 Mbps tests
Framing Unframed
Coding HDB3
Signal rate 34 Mbps

45 Mbps tests
Framing Unframed
Coding 45 frame = C-bit
X-bit = 11
Pattern 2*10-15 PRBS
Signal rate 45 Mbps
SDH tests
For SDH tests, configure the test equipment according to the interface type
being tested, as follows:
Signal rate STM-1, STM-4, or STM-16
Mapping Any mapping (preferably bulk)
Framing Off
Network timing synchronization test

This test checks that the ADR-10000 NEs synchronize properly and switch to
the next priority clock source when a failure occurs.
No. Test procedure Expected results

1. Define one NE as the internal
clock to which all other NEs are
synchronized (an external
source may also be used).
2. Define several priorities for the
timing source.
3. Disconnect the Rx fiber If the NE has a single timing source:
connected to the NE serving as | An alarm is generated for the main
the main timing source. timing source.
| NE timing is set in holdover mode.
If the NE has several timing sources:
| NE timing is synchronized to the
second priority timing source.

| An alarm is generated for the loss
of the main timing source.
Loss of Signal (LOS) detection test

This test verifies that the NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm notification
to the management system for viewing.

1. Create the NEs and links using
the management station.
2. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber A LOS and other alarms generated by
from one of the modules. the disconnection appear at the SPI
level of this module port.
Input sensitivity test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the ADR-10000 optical modules is
according to specification.

1. Create one unprotected trail of
any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one
NE and perform a loopback at
the other NE (in the relevant
endpoint ports).
3. Connect a variable optical
attenuator to one of the fibers of
the relevant trail, and set the
attenuator to 0 dB.
4. Increase the attenuation
gradually until the test
equipment displays a burst of
errors.
5. Connect an optical power meter Verify that the results are in accordance
to the first Rx point after the with the ADR-10000 System
variable optical attenuator and Specifications.
measure the total power; the
measured optical power level is
the input sensitivity of the
module.

Equipment power-on test
This test verifies that the ADR-10000 NEs continue operating properly after a
power break, without operator involvement.

1. Create an unprotected trail at
endpoint ports).
3. Shut off the power to one of the Errors and an Alarm Indication Signal
non-gateway NEs within the (AIS) alarm appear in the test
relevant trail. equipment. After approximately 7
minutes, an "NE disconnected" alarm
appears in the management current
alarm list, and the NE icon turns gray
(no communication).
4. Power on the NE and wait for it
to perform initial download to
all cards/modules in the shelf.
(This can take 20 minutes.)
Verify that the NE is connected
to the management station and
that there are no relevant alarms
in the test equipment or at the
management station.
Traffic stability test

This test verifies that traffic operates according to ITU-T standards.

1. Create an unprotected trail at any rate
between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE and
perform a loopback at the other NE (in
the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Run this test for the appropriate time
interval according to the table below.
4. Verify that no alarms appear in the test You should achieve an error
equipment or at the management free rate of 1 x 10-11 for 2 Mbps
station. and 1 x 10-12 for all other rates.

Table 7-4: Traffic stability test time intervals
2 Mbps 34/45 Mbps STM-1/ STM-4/VC-12 STM-16/VC-48
VC-3
14 hours 7 hours 120 min 30 min 8 min
Path protection and nonretrieval test

This test verifies that SNCP traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.

1. Create one protected trail at any
rate between two NEs.
endpoint ports).
3. Disconnect one of the fibers in Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec
the active path of the trail. appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports an alarm in
the active path of the trail.
4. Verify that the trail carries
traffic properly on the protection
path.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail continues using the protection
path (non-retrieve mode), and the test
equipment indicates no alarm.

MSP test
This test verifies that MSP traffic in the ADR-10000 network operates properly
when a failure occurs.
MSP can be applied in a point-to-point configuration.

1. Create one unprotected trail at
endpoint ports).
the active path of the trail. appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports an alarm in
the active path of the trail.
4. Verify that the trail works
properly on the protection path.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail remains on the protection
path.

MS-SPRing test
This test verifies that the MS-SPRing traffic operates properly when a failure
occurs.

1. Define the ring as MS-SPRing
Node Links - east and west
clockwise.
2. Create one unprotected trail of
endpoint ports).
the path of the trail. appear in the test equipment, and the
trail switches to the protection path and
operates properly.
Management station reports an alarm in
the active path of the trail and LOS
alarms related to the disconnected
fibers.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The alarms related to the disconnected
fibers clear.
After the retrieve time (user-definable),
the trail switches back to the main path,
and short alarm bursts of less than 50
msec appear in the test equipment.
6. Switch back to the main path. The trail operates properly.

IOP hardware protection test
This test verifies that the traffic defined on a card with hardware protection
operates properly when a failure occurs.

1. Using at least one module that
has hardware protection, create
one unprotected trail of any rate
between two NEs. You can use a
module that has the trail passing
through it (for example, SIM) or
ending on it (for example, PIM).
endpoint ports).
3. Extract the protected (working) Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec
module. appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports an alarm
on the trail.
4. Verify that the trail works The orange protection LED on the
properly via the protection relevant TPM lights.
(standby) module.
5. Reinsert the protected (working) After 5 minutes (system default - can
module. be changed), the traffic reverts back to
the protected module. Short alarm
bursts of less than 50 msec appear in
the test equipment, and the
management station reports no alarm
on the trail.

Severity assignment test
This test, which is performed on one ADR-10000 NE, determines the level of
urgency accorded to each alarm and creates an alarm-handling protocol.
When a fault is detected or removed, the NE updates the status of the LEDs and
reports the alarm activation or clearing to the management station.

1. Extract an NVM card from the The management station displays an
MXC card. NVM Card Out alarm of Major
severity.
2. Reinsert the NVM card. The Card Out alarm on the
management station clears.
3. Change the severity of the Card
out alarm for the NVM card to
Minor.
4. Extract the NVM card. The management station displays an
NVM Card Out alarm of Minor
severity.
5. Reinsert the NVM card. The Card Out alarm on the
management station clears.

Transmission alarm handling tests
This test verifies that the ADR-10000 NEs can recognize an alarm and send an
alarm notification to the management system, and that the management system
displays it properly.
This procedure tests the following alarms: PDH-LOS, PDH-AIS, and SPI-LOS.

endpoint ports).
3. Disconnect the Tx cable of the The management station reports a LOS
test equipment. alarm for the relevant PDH port.
4. Set the test equipment to send The management station reports an AIS
an AIS (AIS = on). alarm for the corresponding port.
5. Disconnect the Rx fiber of an The management station reports a LOS
optical port. (SPI-LOS) alarm for the corresponding
port.
| If ALS is off, the management
station reports a far-end optical
port MS-RDI or Line-RDI alarm.
| If ALS is on, the management
station reports a far-end optical
port LOS alarm.

Maintenance actions tests
This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the ADR-10000
NEs using the management system.
This procedure tests a near-end loopback, forced PDH AIS, forced low-rate
RDI, forced high-rate RDI, and forced MS-RDI.

endpoint ports).
3. Perform a near-end loopback at
the other trail endpoint.
4. Using the management station, The PDH test equipment detects an
execute a forced AIS on the AIS alarm.
PDH port that connects to the
test equipment.
MXC redundancy test

This test verifies that the backup MXC operates properly and that the database
is not lost when a failure occurs.

endpoint ports).
3. Select an NE that passes the Neither the test equipment nor the
trail, and extract the MXC on management station detects a traffic
slot A (upper). alarm, but a Card Out alarm for the
MXC appears in the management.
After several minutes, the NE
disconnects from the management
station (turns gray), and then
reconnects to the management with the
same database (switches to the
redundant MXC). The Info windows of
both MXCs display the correct status.

Data Network Commissioning Tests
The data network commissioning tests check that data functionality is in
accordance with system specifications.
Throughput and latency tests

These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network
and the maximum amount of data that can pass through the network before
frames are lost.

1. Create two unprotected trails at any rate
between two NEs in the network.
2. Connect the test equipment to both ports
of one NE.
3. Connect a cross cable on both ports of
the other NE.
4. Configure the test equipment for
measurement of throughput and latency
in accordance with RFC-2544.
5. Measure throughput and latency for
frame sizes 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024,
1280, and 1518 bytes, and record the
results in the appropriate table.
NOTE:
Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths.
For a single path, the latency will be 50% of the measured
value.
The latency test is dependent on the throughput results.
For example, if 10 Mbps is tested and the throughput is
4%, the latency test should be for 4 Mbps (2 * VC-12 = 4
Mbps).
Inject traffic according to the assigned bandwidth (VC-12
= 2.048 Mbps).
Table 7-5: Throughput and latency test results

LAN port & 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518
speed bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/
frame frame frame frame frame frame frame
Throughput
Latency

Frame loss rate test
This test determines the number of frames that are lost when the system is
overloaded.

1. Create two unprotected trails at
any rate (for example, 10/100
Mbps or 1 Gbps) between two
NEs.
2. Connect the test equipment to
both ports of one NE.
3. Connect a cross cable on both
ports of the other NE (in the
relevant endpoint ports).
4. Configure the test equipment for The frame loss rate in % is defined
measurement of frame loss in according to the following formula:
accordance with RFC-2544. Set [(Input fps) – (Output fps)] x
for 100%. 100/(Input fps)
Where fps stands for frames per
second.
Example: At 100 Mbps with 5 VC-12s
(10 Mbps), the Input fps is 148810.
When the Output fps is 14881, the
frame loss is 148810 – 14881 =
133929, which represents 90% loss.

Table 7-6: Frame loss rate test results
Frame 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518
size bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/
frame frame frame frame frame frame frame
Frame rate
(% MFR)
100%
System recovery and reset tests

These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer
overflow condition and from a power failure.

NEs.
manual testing according to the
port rate, and for any frame size.
5. Power off one of the NEs. Verify packet loss in the test
equipment.
6. Turn on the NE and wait for 2 Verify that the errors in the test
minutes. equipment have cleared.

Stability test
This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can function
with no errors for a defined period of time.

NEs.
manual testing according to the
port rate, and for any frame size.
5. Run this test for 2 hours. Verify that no errors appear in the test
equipment.
Alarm handling test

This test checks the alarm conditions forced on the NE and the subsequent
action carried out by the NE. It tests signal loss to both the data LAN port and
to the optical interfaces.

1. Create two trails at any rate (for
example, 10/100 Mbps)
between two NEs.
4. Disconnect the test equipment A 10/100 Mbps - Link Down alarm is
to create a signal loss to the data generated (only if VLAN is created).
LAN port.
5. Disconnect the optical cable to An SPI LOS alarm on the optical
create a signal loss to the optical interface is generated.
interface.

Optical Network Commissioning Tests
The optical network commissioning tests verify normal network operation.
Perform these tests only after the entire network is complete.
Test setup and required test equipment

Optical network commissioning tests check the performance of transmission
paths within the network. To perform these tests, use an optical spectrum
analyzer, optical power meter, variable attenuator, and optical BER tester.
Configure the BER tester to operate at the transponder transmission rate.
The following figure shows the test setup for the optical commissioning tests.
Optical
loopback
TX T
TX
BER
tester R
RX P RX
Attenuator
Mux Demux
TRP ...........
...........
TX
BER
tester
RX
Variable ...........
attenuator ...........
Demux Mux
Figure 7-1: Optical commissioning tests setup
Optical power measurement test

This test verifies that all optical cards/modules and all optical links are
operating according to the optical power budget plan and ADR-10000
specifications.

1. Using an optical power meter, measure The measurement results are within
the input and output optical levels of the range of minimum and
each optical component (card, module, maximum levels specified for each
and so on). Record the results of all the type of optical component (see
measurements (Excel file); these results ADR System Specifications).
provide the information needed to
evaluate the optical budget of the
network.

2. Using an optical spectrum analyzer, The measured levels are within the
measure the following parameters for range expected in accordance with
each link: the planned optical network power
| Spectrum of the composite line budget.
signal
| Power per channel
| OSNR (Optical Signal to Noise
Ratio)
| Gain tilt
For this purpose, measure the optical
signals at the input and output of each
active and passive optical component
(optical booster, preamplifier, OADM,
MUX, DEMUX, supervisory channel
interfaces, and so on).
Equipment power-on test

This test verifies that the ADR-10000 NEs continue operating normally after a
power break, without operator involvement.

1. Select one of the optical paths
in the network.
TRPs).
3. Shut off the power to one of the An alarm appears in the test equipment
non-gateway NEs within the and the management station.
relevant optical path. After approximately seven minutes, an
"NE disconnected" alarm appears in the
management current alarm list, and the
NE icon turns gray (no
communication).
4. Power on the NE and wait for it Can take up to 20 minutes.
to perform initial download to
all cards in the shelf.
5. Verify that the NE is connected
to the management station and
that there are no alarms related
to the relevant optic path in the
test equipment or at the
management station.

LOS detection test
This test verifies that the ADR-10000 NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm
notification to the management system for viewing.

1. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber A LOS alarm at the SPI level of this
from one of the optical modules. module post appears, together with
other alarms caused by the
disconnection.
Input sensitivity test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the ADR-10000 optical
cards/modules is according to their technical specification.

1. Select one of the optical
transmission paths in the network.
2. Connect the test equipment to one
NE and perform a loopback at the
other NE .
3. Connect a variable optical
attenuator to one of the fibers of
the relevant path.
4. Set the attenuator to 0 dB.
5. Slowly increase the attenuation
until the test equipment displays a
burst of errors.
6. Connect an optical power meter to The measured optical power level is
the first Rx point after the variable the input sensitivity of the card.
optical attenuator and measure the
total power.
Path protection test

This test verifies that the protected traffic operates properly when a failure
occurs.

1. Select one of the protected optical
paths in the network.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE
and perform a loopback at the other
NE (in the relevant TRPs).

3. Disconnect one of the optical fibers Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec
in the active path of the optical appear in the test equipment and
channel. management station.
4. Verify that the optical channel
works properly on the protection
path.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The optical channel remains on the
protection path (non-retrieve mode),
and no alarm appears in the test
equipment.
Maintenance action handling test

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the ADR-10000
NEs using the management system. This procedure tests a manual switch,
forced switch, and switch lockout.

1. Select one of the protected
optical transmission paths in the
network.
TRPs).
3. From the management system, Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec
perform a manual switch. appear in the test equipment.
works properly on the protection
path.
5. Disconnect the line input of the
nonactive TRP from its MUX.
6. From the management system, Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec
perform a manual switch. appear in the test equipment.
works properly on the main path.
8. Disconnect the line input of the
nonactive TRP from its
DEMUX.
9. From the management station, The optical channel switches to the
perform a manual switch. protected path, and a LOS alarm
appears in the test equipment.
10. From the management system,
perform a switch lockout on the
nonactive TRP.

11. Disconnect the line input of the The optical channel does not switch to
active TRP from its DEMUX. the protected path, and a LOS alarm
appears in the test equipment.
BER and stability test

This test verifies that the optical channels in the ADR-10000 optical network
operate without errors (according to ITU-T standards).

1. Select one of the protected optical
paths in the network.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE
and perform a loopback at the other
NE (in the relevant TRPs).
3. Run this test for the appropriate time
interval according to the following
table.
4. Verify that no alarms appear in the You should achieve an error free rate
test equipment or at the management of 1 x 10-12.
station.
Table 7-7: BER and Stability Test time intervals
Rate STM-1 STM-4 STM-16
Time period 120 min 30 min 8 min

8
Maintenance
In this chapter:
Overview..........................................................................................................8-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials .............................................8-1
Preventive Maintenance...................................................................................8-2
Traffic Monitoring System ..............................................................................8-6
Onsite Troubleshooting..................................................................................8-10
Replacing Cards and Modules .......................................................................8-17
Replacing RAP Components .........................................................................8-23
Overview
This chapter provides maintenance procedures for ADR-10000 equipment.
Required Test Equipment, Tools,

and Materials
For most maintenance activities described in this chapter, only a Craft terminal
and a multimeter are required. If you need to make measurements, it is
recommended to use equipment of the same type and models used for
commissioning tests (on page 7-1). The tools and materials necessary for
equipment installation must also be available during maintenance.

Preventive Maintenance
The purpose of the preventive maintenance activities is to keep the ADR-10000
hardware in good condition, and detect and correct as soon as possible any
condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction.
Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the
procedures used in your organization.
Table 8-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks
Item Inspection/Check Intervals*
W M Q
1. Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers. Check for X

correct routing (no sharp bends) and proper support to avoid
stress. Avoid touching fibers during the inspection, except as
required to correct problems.
2. Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection terminals, X
grounding, and so on, and pay special attention to any signs of
corrosion.
3. Check condition of rack front doors and RFI fingers. Clean as X
necessary with approved cleaning agents.
4. Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air X
conditioners, lighting, distribution panels, and so on) and their
power sources.
5. Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by X
protective covers. Add covers as necessary.
6. Check that cards and modules are securely attached: all X
extractor handles must be in the storage position (parallel to
the card edge), and all module fastening screws must be tight
(tighten only manually).
7. Check for proper operation of the FCU300 (no abnormal noise X
and vibrations) in all NEs.
8. Check that the FCU300 is fully inserted in its chassis position X
and that its screws are tight.
9. Clean the FCU300 and inspect the air filters. Clean or replace X
the air filters if necessary.
10. Clean all areas around the shelf in the rack and the rack's front X
door (if applicable), using a vacuum cleaner.
11. Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources (main X
and backup) to the RAP are properly connected.
12. Check that the external alarm cables are properly connected to X
the RAP.

Item Inspection/Check Intervals*
W M Q
13. Check that there are no alarm indications on the cards and X
modules.
14. Check that all RAP LEDs turn on and that the buzzer sounds X
when the POWER ON pushbutton on the RAP panel is
pressed.
15. Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when the LED X
TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F panel is pressed.
16. Perform a visual check of LED indications. X
17. Check the proper operation of the OW system (if applicable to X
the NE).
*Legend: W weekly M monthly Q quarterly
Air Filter Preventive Maintenance

Air particles trapped by the air filter increase the resistance to airflow, and can
eventually decrease the airflow below the minimum required for proper cooling
of internal components. The resulting increase in the internal temperature of the
equipment reduces the equipment reliability and performance. Therefore,
whenever an air filter is installed, it must periodically be cleaned or replaced
with a clean filter.
It is accepted throughout the electronics equipment industry to recommend
cleaning or replacing air filters approximately every 90 days. However, the
cleaning intervals depend on the specific environmental conditions. In dusty
environments more frequent cleaning is required. Note that foam filters, which
are the type used in ADR platforms, efficiently trap particles without showing
face loading of contaminants, and therefore visual inspection cannot be used to
determine cleaning intervals.
CAUTION: Filter cleaning intervals must strictly be

observed, as clogging by trapped particles can severely impair
equipment reliability and performance.
Recommended Cleaning Methods

The following methods (listed in order of ascending efficiency) can be used to
clean air filters:
1. Vacuum clean: A few passes of a vacuum cleaner remove accumulated
dust and dirt in seconds. Point the air nozzle in the direction of operating
airflow (vacuum from intake side toward exhaust side).
2. Blow with compressed air: Point a compressed air nozzle in the opposite
direction of the operating airflow (blow from the exhaust side toward the
intake side).

NOTE: Oily residues and moisture reduce cleaning efficiency
of the above methods; in such cases, clean the filter using
method No. 4, or replace the filter.
3. Cold water rinse: Under normal service conditions, the foam media used
in the filters require no oily adhesives. Therefore, collected dust and dirt
can be washed away using a standard hose nozzle with plain water. Stand
the filter until completely dry and free of moisture, and return to service.
4. Immersion in warm soapy water: Where stubborn airborne dirt is present,
the filter may be dipped in a solution of warm water and mild detergent.
Then simply rinse in clear water, stand until completely dry and free of
moisture, and return to service.
The recommended method is No. 4, as it ensures thorough cleaning of all types
of contaminants under any reasonable service conditions.
Cleaning the air filter

For the procedure steps, refer to the following figure.
Figure 8-1: Inserting the air filter

NOTE: The air filter can be removed and reinstalled while
the ADR-10000 shelf is in operation.
To clean the air filter:

1. Release the two thumbnuts fastening the filter in the upmost position.
2. Lower the filter frame and pull the filter out.
3. Inspect the filter for damage. If any damage (for example, holes or torn
material) is evident, replace the filter with a new one.
CAUTION: Replace the filter only with a filter of the original

type. Failure to do so can impair equipment reliability and
performance.
4. Clean the filter using the method selected by your organization.

5. Identify the filter's air intake side, indicated by the two coding tabs.
6. Insert the clean filter in the holding frame, lift the thumbnuts and fasten
them in place.

Traffic Monitoring System
Principles of Operation
The ADR-10000 incorporates a traffic monitoring system that enables rapid
allocation of major problems in the traffic passing through its aggregate and I/O
modules.
The ADR-10000 monitoring system enables you to monitor traffic passing
through the I/O modules installed in slots I1 to I16 of the modules cages.
The main components of the monitoring system interface are located on the
ECU300-F front panel. These components, except for the monitoring point and
monitoring indicator, are common to all modules. In addition, the system has a
monitoring point and monitoring indicators on the front panel of the modules.
The PIM2_21, PIM2_63/B, and PIM345 have only one monitoring indicator
used for all their channels. STM-1 modules do not have a monitoring point, and
use the monitoring point on the ECU300-F card.
Figure 8-2: ECU300-F monitoring system interface
The system's common components on the ECU300-F are as follows:

| MODULE selector
| CHANNEL selector
| MODULE, 2-digit display
| CHANNEL, 2-digit display
The ECU300-F components that serve only STM-1 modules are:
| STM-1 MON monitoring point
| MON indicator
The monitoring system components on the monitored modules include:
| MON monitoring point

| MON indicators
Figure 8-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module
The monitoring system enables you to monitor traffic passing through a

module. To do so, test equipment is connected to the monitoring point of the
corresponding module, and the module and port are selected by the system's
selectors. As a result, the traffic is closed through the test equipment and the
signal can be viewed, in an eye pattern, on the test equipment display.
Selecting a module
The MODULE selector chooses the monitored module slot number. The
selected module is displayed on the 2-digit display to the right of the selector.
Pressing the selector upward increments the slot number; pressing it downward
decrements the slot number. The selection is cyclic. Possible selections are QA
and QB for the aggregate cards (I/O cards), and I1 to I16 for the I/O modules. If
the selected module is an STM-1, the MON indicator on the ECU300-F lights.
Selecting a channel
The CHANNEL selector chooses the specific monitored channel (port) on the
module selected. The selected channel is displayed on the 2-digit display to the
left of the selector. Pressing the selector upward increments the channel
number; pressing it downward decrements the channel number. The selection is
cyclic. Possible selections are from 00 to the module's maximum number of
channels. For example, in a PIM2_21 (which has 21 ports), the selection goes
from 00 to 21. When the value 00 is selected, the system blocks the monitoring
to the selected module.
In addition to the number of the selected channel shown on the display, a MON
indicator lights near the selected port on the module. If an STM-1 module is
selected, the MON indicator on the ECU300-F lights in addition to the LED
near the selected port on the module.
Stabilization time
The monitoring system has a stabilization time of approximately 1.5 seconds.
This means that after a new value is selected with the MODULE or CHANNEL
selectors, the display starts blinking for the stabilization time, and only after
that the new selection is displayed.

Response to events
This section describes the response of the monitoring system to the following
events:
| Power-on
| Cold restart
| MXC300 switching to redundancy
| Warm restart
| ECU300-F extraction/insertion
After power-on, the monitoring system displays 17 00. This is the default state,
and indicates slot QA and channel 00. Channel 00 is defined in the system as
idle state, and indicates that no channel was selected and that monitoring is
disabled. To enable the monitoring results, a module and a channel must be
selected.
The response of the system to MXC300 switching to redundancy is identical to
the response to cold restart.
Warm restart does not affect the traffic or monitoring of any modules in the
ADR-10000.
After extracting/inserting the ECU300-F, the monitoring display is reset to the
default state 17 00, and the monitoring history stored in the ECU300-F's
memory is lost.
Assigning modules to slots

To monitor a module installed in a specific slot, the management system must
have previously assigned that module to the slot. If the module was not
assigned, the CHANNEL display will indicate 00 and remain in this state, even
if you attempt to change the selection.
If a module in a slot is replaced with a module of the same type, the display will
not change and the system will read the monitoring result for the channel that
was last selected. If a module has to be replaced with a module of a different
type, the new module must be assigned to the slot. Then, a new MODULE and
CHANNEL selection must be made.
Monitoring options
The system can monitor a number of channels in different modules
simultaneously. This feature is useful when traffic passing through different
modules in the ADR-10000 has to be analyzed.
After monitoring channels of different modules, all selected channel numbers
of these modules are saved in the ECU-F's memory.
You can connect test equipment to various modules or connect test equipment
with multiple inputs to simultaneously monitor the traffic passing through the
channels in these modules.

Monitoring Signal Levels
The following table lists the normal signal levels at the monitoring points for
the various modules.
Table 8-2: I/O modules monitoring data
Module type Monitoring point Number of Signal rate and level
channels (ports)
SIM1_4/O ECU300-F front 4 155 Mbps, CMI
SIM1_4/OB panel
SIM1_4/E ECU300-F front 4 155 Mbps, CMI
panel
SIM1_8 ECU300-F front 8 155 Mbps, CMI
panel
SIM4_2 Module front panel 2 622 Mbps, NRZ
SIM4_4 Module front panel 4 622 Mbps, NRZ
PIM2_21 Module front panel 21 2.048 Mbps, HDB-3
PIM2_63/B Module front panel 63 2.048 Mbps, HDB-3
PIM345_3 Module front panel 3 34 or 45 Mbps, HDB-3
Monitoring Modules Traffic

Monitoring the traffic of STM-1 and other modules operating at a different rate
is similar, and differs only in the location of the monitoring point and LED
indicators.
To monitor the traffic in a non-STM-1 module:

1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored.
2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point.
3. Select the slot number of the monitored module using the MODULE
selector.
4. Select the channel number of the monitored port using the CHANNEL
selector.
5. Wait for the display to stabilize (stop blinking), and then verify that the
required slot and channel were selected.
6. Verify that the MON indicator of the selected channel lights.
7. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring
point.
To monitor the traffic in an STM-1 module:

1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored.
2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point on the ECU300-F card.

3. Perform Steps 3 to 5 in the previous section.
4. Verify that the MON indicator on the ECU300-F card and the
corresponding MON indicator on the STM-1 module light.
5. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring
point.
Onsite Troubleshooting
The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the
malfunction and return the equipment to normal operation as soon as possible.
Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following
conditions:
| Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station.
| Alarm or malfunction detected on site by maintenance personnel, either as a
result of a troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center
personnel or as a result of a periodic inspection or preventive maintenance
action. Many problems can be detected via the various indicators available
on the ADR-10000 system components.
This chapter assumes familiarity with the ADR-10000, with SDH, data, and
with the NMS and EMS-ADR management stations. Refer to the respective
user manuals for details on the various capabilities of the management stations,
and for instructions on performing the desired activities.
The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite
troubleshooting for various trouble categories, as well as for specific
subsystems, and so on. For each category, you will find a troubleshooting table
that provides the instructions for identifying the trouble.
To use the troubleshooting table:

1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under “Symptoms”.
2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under “Corrective actions” in
the order in which they appear until the trouble is corrected.

Troubleshooting Power Problems
Table 8-3: Troubleshooting power problems
No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions
1 RAP POWER Both main and 1. Check the site power distribution system.
ON indicator backup power 2. Check the DC voltage at the main and backup power
is off. sources failed. terminals of the RAP.
3. If the voltage is not within the correct range, check
cable connections up to the DC power distribution
panel, and make sure no fuses are blown.
4. Check the voltage supplied by the main and backup
power sources.
5. Check the power connections to the RAP.
6. Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if
necessary.
Equipment 1. Check the voltage at the MXC300 end of each power
problem. cable. Replace the cable or repair the RAP if there is no
voltage present.
2. If after checking (as explained above) and reconnecting
a cable to the equipment, the circuit breaker trips again,
replace the corresponding MXC300 card.
3. If the problem occurs again after Step 2, remove all the
cards and modules from the shelf and reinsert them one
by one until you find the component causing the circuit
breaker to trip. Replace that component
2 MXC300 No input power to 1. Check the corresponding circuit breaker in the RAP;
ACTIVE the corresponding reset any tripped breaker.
indicator is unit. 2. Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if
off. necessary.
3. If the circuit breaker trips again, disconnect the cable
protected by the corresponding circuit breaker from the
equipment and check the voltage polarity.
4. Check the power cable condition and make sure that
the cable is not damaged and does not cause short
circuits.
5. Check proper cable connection at both ends.
3 MXC300 Technical failure Replace the unit.
FAIL in the
indicator corresponding
lights. unit.
Troubleshooting Using Component

Indicators
The management station will usually provide onsite personnel with a list of
suspected components.
Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators.
These indicators, located on the various cards and modules, can help you to
rapidly and efficiently identify a malfunctioning component in accordance with
the procedures outlined in the following tables.
NOTE: See description of indicator functions in the ADR-

10000 Product Line Reference Manual.

CAUTION: The following corrective actions are
traffic-affecting.
Table 8-4: General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules

No. Symptoms Probable Corrective actions
cause
1 Green ACT/AC Defective Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F,
indicator is off. indicator and check that the indicator lights. If not, replace the
card/module.
Defective 1. Remove the card/module and wait a minute before
card/module reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the card or
module in its slot.
2. If the ACT/AC indicator does not turn on after
reinsertion, replace the card/module.
2 Red FAIL/FL Defective 1. Remove the card/module and wait a few minutes before
indicator does card/module reinserting it. Make sure the ACT/AC indicator turns on
not turn off after the card/module is reinserted.
after software 2. The FAIL/FL indicator must flash while software is
download (this downloaded to the card/module. Wait until the software
occurs after download is complete and check that the FAIL/FL
power-on and indicator turns off.
resetting).
3. If the FAIL/FL indicator turns on again, replace the
card/module.
3 Orange (traffic Card/module Check with the management station operator if the
carrying) not configured card/module has already been configured and provisioned; if
indicator is off to carry traffic not, ignore the state of the orange indicator.
when indicator
is supported.
CAUTION: Before checking fiber break problems using an

OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer), it is the user's
responsibility to disconnect the receiver port. Failure to do so
may damage the receiver irreparably.
Table 8-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins

1 Green The 1. When available, press the laser-on pushbutton of the
transceiver state corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F to activate the corresponding
indicator is off. optical laser.
transmitter may 2. If the problem persists, the laser automatically turns
have been turned off again after a few seconds. Check that all the fibers
off by the ALS are properly connected to the corresponding optical
function (see transceiver.
note below).
3. Replace the transceiver if the problem is not corrected
after the transceiver is reinserted.
2 Transceiver Test equipment 1. For plug-in transceivers with monitoring connector:
state indicator is connected to the test equipment is connected to the monitoring
lights in red. the monitoring connector. This indication is provided for
connector of the identification purposes, and does not necessarily
corresponding indicate a malfunction.
plug-in.
Defective 1. Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver and
transceiver. remove it.
2. Reinstall the transceiver in its position, making sure

to fully engage its connector to the mating card
connector.
3. Replace the transceiver if the problem is not corrected
after the transceiver is reinserted.
NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its

transmitter when the corresponding receive signal is lost.
Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction, which
turns the optical signals off in a whole section of the network
and generates a large number of alarms.
As a result, it may be difficult to identify the real cause of the
problem, and you may need to use the management station
log records to identify the port.
Table 8-6: Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules

1 Green AC Defective Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F
indicator is indicator and check that the indicator lights. If not, replace the
off. card/module.
Defective 1. Remove the module and wait a minute before reinserting
module it. Make sure that you fully insert the module in its slot.
2. If the AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion,
replace the module.
2 Red FL Defective 1. Remove the module and wait a few minutes before
indicator does module reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator turns
not turn off on after the module is reinserted.
after software 2. The FL indicator must flash while software is
download downloaded to the module. Wait until the software
(this occurs download ends and check that the FL indicator turns off.
after power-on 3. If the FL indicator turns on again, replace the module.
and resetting).
Table 8-7: Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and Mux/DeMux

1 Green AC Defective 1. Remove the module and wait a minute before reinserting
indicator is module it. Make sure that you fully insert the module in its slot.
off. 2. If the AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion,
replace the module.
indicator does module reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator turns
not turn off on after the module is reinserted.
after software 2. The FL indicator must flash while software is
download downloaded to the component. Wait until the software
(this occurs download ends and check that the FL indicator turns off.
after power-on
3. If the FL indicator turns on again, replace the module.
and resetting).
Table 8-8: Troubleshooting procedures for EISMs

1 Green AC Defective 1. Remove the module and wait a minute before reinserting
indicator is off. module it. Make sure that you fully insert the card in its slot.
2. If the AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion,
replace the module.
indicator on the module reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator turns
module does on after the module is reinserted.

not turn off 2. The FL indicator must flash while software is
after software downloaded to the module. Wait until the software
download (this download ends and check that the FL indicator turns off.
occurs after 3. If the FL indicator turns on again, replace the module.
power-on and
resetting).
3 Orange (traffic Module not Check with the management station operator whether the
carrying) configured to module has already been configured and provisioned; if not,
indicator on carry traffic ignore the state of the orange indicator.
module is off.
4 Green (link Problem related 1. Check port configuration.

state) indicator to port 2. Check connections to LAN.
of an Ethernet
3. Make sure at least one LAN station is active.
optical port is
off. 4. Replace optical transceiver of port.
5 Link state Problem related 1. Check port configuration.

indicator of a to port 2. Check connections to LAN.
10/100BaseT 3. Make sure at least one LAN station is active.
Ethernet port is
off.
Troubleshooting the Timing Subsystem

Table 8-9: Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem
1 Switching to Technical failure Force switching of traffic to the other MXC300, and
standby TMU then replace the MXC300 card with the defective TMU.
Missing T3/BITS 1. Check the equipment providing the external
IN external reference signal and make sure it operates
reference signal normally.
2. Check the cable connected to the corresponding
ECU300/ECU300-F connector. Make sure both its
ends are properly connected to the mating
connector.
3. Check the cable wiring. Replace the cable if in
doubt.
4. Replace the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F.
Missing T4/BITS 1. Check the cable connected to the corresponding
OUT external ECU300/ECU300-F connector. Make sure both its
reference signal ends are properly connected to the mating
connector.
2. Check the cable wiring. Replace the cable if in
doubt.
3. Replace the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F.
4. Force switching of traffic to the other MXC300,
and then replace the MXC300 with the defective
TMU.
Loss of reference Troubleshoot the corresponding module and replace it if
clock source found faulty.
provided by a
tributary

Troubleshooting Transmission and Traffic
Alarms
Before any other troubleshooting activity, check the management station log to
check if a specific component has been reported as faulty and replace it.
CAUTION: Before checking fiber break problems using an

OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer), it is the user's
responsibility to disconnect the receiver port. Failure to do so
may damage the receiver irreparably.
Table 8-10: Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms

1 Alarm related External problem 1. Check the proper operation of the equipment providing
to a client the tributary signal and its connections to the ADR-
signal 10000 I/O port.
2. Use the results of the commissioning tests as a
reference for the required signal levels, and make
measurements of current levels at all the relevant
monitoring points.
Compare the reference levels with the measured
values; a significant discrepancy may point to the failed
component (for example, low transmit level, excessive
fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on).
2 Alarm related External problem 1. Check the proper operation of the equipment providing
to a line signal the line signal and its connections to the ADR-10000
port.
2. Use the network and site documentation to identify the
path associated with the reported alarm and all related
optical and/or electrical components. Use the results of
the commissioning tests as a reference for the required
signal levels, and make measurements of current levels
at all the relevant monitoring points through the
management.
3. Compare the reference levels with the measured
values; a significant discrepancy may point to the failed
component (for example, low transmit level, excessive
fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on).

Troubleshooting Management
Communication
When the management station cannot manage an ADR-10000 shelf, use the
following table to identify the cause of the problem.
NOTE: Whenever you detect problems during

commissioning tests and when troubleshooting a new
installation, do not overlook the possibility of configuration
and/or provisioning errors. Under such circumstances, always
start the troubleshooting procedures by reviewing all
equipment configuration and provisioning parameters against
the original network design, and correct as necessary.
Table 8-11: Troubleshooting management communication

1 Problems in Defective 1. Check for fault indications on the cards processing the
management card/module in management communication (see General
traffic path management troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules (on
traffic path page 8-12)).
2. Force switching to the protection path and reset each
component. Use the results of the BIT test to identify
the faulty component.
Problem in 1. Use the network and site documentation to identify
transmission the path of the management communication to the
path corresponding ADR shelf and all the related optical
components.
2. Use the results of the commissioning tests as a
reference for the required signal levels, and make
measurements of current levels at all the relevant
monitoring points through the management.
3. Compare the reference levels with the measured
values; a significant discrepancy may point to the
failed component (for example, low transmit level,
excessive fiber attenuation due to physical damage,
and so on).
Other problems Replace suspected components in the following sequence:
1. Hubs and Ethernet cables used for management traffic
2. ECU300/ECU300-F
3. MXC300

Replacing Cards and Modules
Safety and Workmanship
Refer to Before You Start/Safety Guidelines (on page 1-1) for safety and
workmanship instructions.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices

PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING
PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED
ADR-10000 equipment contains components sensitive to
electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage,
strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection against
ESD. Keep parts and cards in their antistatic packaging
material until you are ready to install them.
Use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack when handling cards and modules
during installation, removal, or connection to internal
connectors.
Before you start:

When inserting cards and modules, make sure to carefully align the card or
module with the shelf guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion,
immediately retract the card/module and then repeat the process.
Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and
modules.
Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure
that there are no signs of physical damage. In particular, check for bent
connector pins.
Before replacing any card, module, NVM, or optical

transceiver:
1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged
during shipment.
2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection
packaging, and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during
shipment. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component
identification labels, and make sure they are compatible with those of the
component to be replaced.

After replacing a component:
1. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it.
2. Attach a report to the package explaining the reason for the replacement,
and identify the network site, physical location, shelf, and time of
replacement.
Replacing MXC300 Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the MXC300.
CAUTION:
Do not extract/insert an MXC300 while the DC cables are
connected to it.
blink simultaneously, the MXC300 is not mounted
correctly or not all four screws are properly locked.
Before attempting to remove the card, monitor its NVM
(yellow) indicator; remove the card only after this
indicator has been off for at least 2 minutes.
To replace the MXC300:

1. Initiate a forced switching to the other MXC300.
2. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC300 to be replaced turns
off and remains off for at least 2 minutes, and then remove the NVM card
as described in Replacing the NVM on MXC300 cards. It is recommended
to wait until the yellow indicator of the other MXC300 card also turns off.
CAUTION: When replacing any MXC300 card, the upper left

screw operates a microswitch. When this screw is open, it
indicates to the ADR-10000 platform that the MXC300 is not
installed. This screw must be opened first when replacing an
MXC300 card.
3. Open the MXC300 upper left screw first, then the upper right screw, and
then the two lower screws.
4. Hold both extractor handles and pull them simultaneously outward until the
card is released from the backplane.
5. Keep holding the handles, and gently pull the card out of the shelf.
6. If necessary, transfer the NVM from the replaced MXC300 card to its
replacement (see Replacing the NVM on MXC300 cards).

7. Insert the rear end of the replacement card into the corresponding card
guides.
8. Push the card’s front panel with both hands until the extractor handles
attach to the panel.
9. Push the card in by holding both handles and pushing them simultaneously
inward, until the card mates the chassis connectors and is locked in place. If
you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and
10. Close the card’s upper left screws first, then the upper right screw, and then
the two lower screws.
NOTE: Make sure that all four screws in the MXC300 are
properly tightened. Failing to do so may result in improper
operation of the shelf.
blink simultaneously, the MXC is not mounted correctly or
not all four screws are properly locked.
Replacing the NVM on MXC300 Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the NVM.
CAUTION: To prevent disruption of data stored on the NVM,

make sure you do not open the NVM cover while the
MXC300 accesses the NVM. Before attempting to remove
the NVM, monitor the NVM (yellow) indicator; open the
NVM cover only after the NVM indicator on the MXC300
has been off for at least 2 minutes.
To replace the NVM:

1. Force switch to the other MXC300.
2. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC300 on which the NVM
is to be replaced turns off, and remains off for at least 2 minutes.
3. Open the two captive screws fastening the NVM cover to the MXC300.
4. Press the NVM release pushbutton, using the NVM cover edge as an
extractor tool.
5. Carefully extract the NVM from the MXC300.
6. Orient the replacement NVM in the correct position and push it straight into
its socket.
7. Replace the NVM's cover, and fasten it to the MXC300 with its two captive
screws.

At this stage, you may either wait for the automatic updating of the database
stored on the new NVM (this may take up to one hour), or immediately force a
switching to the MXC300 on which the NVM has been replaced.
Replacing ECU300/ECU300-F Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the ECU300/ECU300-F.
CAUTION: Replace the ECU300/ECU300-F card as rapidly

as possible. While the ECU300/ECU300-F card is out,
management, debugging, T3/T4 synchronization, and other
tasks supported by this card are not possible.
Before attempting to remove the card, monitor the NVM
(yellow) and TMU (orange) indicators of the MXC300
installed in the shelf; remove the ECU300/ECU300-F only
after the MXC300 indicators have been off for at least 2
minutes.
To replace the ECU300/ECU300-F:

1. Mark each cable connected to the card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect the cables connected to the ECU300/ECU300-F.
3. Open the two captive screws fastening the card to the shelf.
4. Remove the card to be replaced by pulling its handle.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement card in the corresponding card guides.
6. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel resistance
7. Fasten the card to the shelf by its two captive screws.
8. Reconnect the cables disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement card.

Replacing I/O Modules
The following procedure is applicable to all I/O modules.
Before you start:

For modules with electrical interfaces that use electrical interface protection via
TPMs, first force a switch to the protection module (IOP) before replacing the
module.
To replace I/O modules:

1. Mark each cable and fiber connected to the module for identification
purposes.
2. Disconnect any cables or fibers connected to the module to be replaced.
3. Open the captive screws fastening the module to the shelf.
4. Remove the module to be replaced by pulling its handle.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.
6. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel
resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat
the procedure.
7. Fasten the module to the shelf by its captive screws.
8. Reconnect any cables or fibers disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement
module.

Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers
SAGEMCOM's Network Solutions Division supplies field-replaceable
SFP/XFP transceivers. Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe all the
safety precautions described in Laser Device Operating Precautions during the
replacement.
To replace an SFP/XFP transceiver:

1. Mark each fiber connected to the transceiver for identification purposes.
2. Identify the position of the SFP/XFP transceiver to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver.
4. Remove the transceiver plug-in by pulling its tab.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed
position, and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place (see the following figure). If you feel resistance before the
transceiver plug-in is fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the
insertion.
Figure 8-4: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module
6. Reconnect the fibers disconnected in Step 3.

Replacing the FCU300
The FCU300 can be replaced without disconnecting the power from the ADR-
10000 shelf.
CAUTION: To prevent the shelf overheating, complete the

replacement within 2 to 3 minutes.
To replace the FCU300:

1. Prepare the replacement FCU300 so you can install it immediately after
removing the old FCU300. In particular, carefully inspect the interior of the
FCU300 to ensure that no foreign matter, for example, packaging chips, is
present inside the unit.
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the FCU300 to the shelf.
3. Carefully remove the FCU300 to be replaced by slowly pulling it out of the
shelf. Be aware that the internal fans may still be rotating.
4. Insert the replacement FCU300 in the corresponding shelf guides, and push
it carefully in until the FCU300 fully engages the mating internal connector
of the ADR-10000 shelf. Make sure that the FCU300 front panel is flush
with the shelf frame front edges. As the FCU300 is plugged into its mating
connector, the green ACTIVE indicator on its panel should turn on.
5. Fasten the FCU300 to the shelf by its two captive screws.
Replacing RAP Components

This section provides instructions for replacing RAP components identified as
faulty via the troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter.
Replacing xRAP-D/xRAP-B Circuit Breakers

xRAP-D and xRAP-B circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting
the power (hot swapping).
To replace the xRAP-D/xRAP-B circuit breakers:

1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D/xRAP-B front cover to
its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).
2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of
its socket.
3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced
circuit breaker.

WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire,
replace only with a circuit breaker of the same type and
rating.
ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromettre la protection
contre les risques d’incendie, remplacer par un fusible de
même type et de mêmes caractéristiques nominales.
4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the
corresponding xRAP-D/xRAP-B power terminal board, as shown in the
following figures.
5. Reinstall the xRAP-D/xRAP-B front cover and fasten it with its two captive
screws.
Figure 8-5: Replacing the xRAP-B circuit breakers

Figure 8-6: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers

A
Connector Pin Assignments
In this appendix:
Overview......................................................................................................... A-1
ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors............................................................ A-1
MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors ........................................................... A-7
PIM2_21 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-8
PIM2_42 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-11
PIM2_63/B Connection Data........................................................................ A-17
EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors .............................................................. A-21
xRAP-D/xRAP-B Connectors ...................................................................... A-22
Overview
This appendix provides connection data for the user connectors located in ADR
shelves and associated ancillary equipment supplied by SAGEMCOM. Optical
and coaxial connectors are described in the ADR-10000 Reference Manual.
Any connectors not described in this appendix are reserved for use by
SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division technical support personnel and/or
for future expansion, and therefore no user equipment may be connected to
them.
ECU300/ECU300-F Card
Connectors
ALARMS Connector
The ALARMS connector is a 36-pin SCSI female connector that carries three
groups of lines:

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page A-1
| Five external alarm input lines referenced to an internal power supply
common line (the power supply’s common line is floating relative to the
chassis ground). The alarm input lines are monitored by the ADR-10000
management subsystem. Each input is connected to the input diode of an
optocoupler.
| Three external alarm outputs/inputs. Each output is provided by three relay
dry contacts. These lines can be configured as additional alarm inputs by
the system’s management.
| Four severity alarm outputs and a buzzer control line. Each output is
provided by three relay dry contacts. The buzzer control line is provided by
two dry contacts.
Relay contact ratings are 75 V in open state and 1A in closed state.
The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the
connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the ALARMS connector.
Pin 18 Pin 1
Pin 36 Pin 19
Figure A-1: ALARMS connector pin identification
The ALARMS connector can be connected in several configurations to the

customer’s alarm collecting facility. It can be connected directly to the
customer’s distribution frame or via xRAP rack alarm panels to the customer’s
facility. SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division offers appropriate cables
for each of the configurations. These cables are described in the sections that
follow.
Table A-1: ALARMS connector pin assignment
Pin Designation Function Direction Pin Designation Function Direction
1 COMMON_F Floating Input 19 CRIT_NC Critical Output
power supply alarm NC
common
2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, Input 20 CRIT_NO Critical Output
+ wire alarm NO
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, Input 21 CRIT_COM Critical Output
– wire alarm
common
4 ALM_IP2 Alarm input 2, Input 22 MAJ_NC Major Output
+ wire alarm NC
5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, Input 23 MAJ_COM Major Output

– wire alarm
common
6 ALM_IP3 Alarm input 3, Input 24 MAJ_NO Major Output
+ wire alarm NO
7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, Input 25 MIN_NC Minor Output
– wire alarm NC
8 ALM_IP4 Alarm input 4, Input 26 MIN_NO Minor Output
+ wire alarm NO

Pin Designation Function Direction Pin Designation Function Direction
9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, Input 27 MIN_COM Minor Output
– wire alarm
common
10 ALM_IP5 Alarm input 5, Input 28 WARN_NC Warning Output
+ wire alarm NC
11 ALM_IN5 Alarm input 5, Input 29 WARN_COM Warning Output
– wire alarm
common
12 ALM_O1NO/ Alarm output Output/ 30 WARN_NO Warning Output
IN6 1 NO/input 6, Input alarm NO
– wire
13 ALM_O1/IP6 Alarm output Output/ 31 ALM_O3NO/ Alarm Output/
1 common/ Input IN8 output 3 Input
input 6, + wire common/
input 8, –
wire
14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output Output 32 ALM_O3/IP8 Alarm Output/
1 NC output 3 Input
common/
input 8, +
wire
15 ALM_O2NO/ Alarm output Output/ 33 ALM_O3NC Alarm Output
IN7 2 NO/input 7, Input output 3
– wire NC
16 ALM_O2/IP7 Alarm output Output/ 34 EXTA_SN2 External Input
2 common/ Input alarm
input 7, + wire sense 2
17 ALM_O2NC Alarm output Output 35 BUZ_NO Audio Input
2 NC alarm
activation
line
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer Input 36 EXTA_SN1 External Input
common alarm
sense 1
NOTE: Alarm outputs of ALM_01NO/IN6, ALM_O1/IP6,

ALM_O2NO/IN7, ALM_O2/IP7, ALM_O3NO/IN8, and
ALM_O3/IP8 can be configured as alarm inputs by system
management.

Alarms client cable
This cable provides a direct connection between the ADR-10000 and the
customer’s distribution frame. The cable has a 36-pin SCSI male connector on
one end which connects to the ALARMS connector, and open wires for
connecting to the customer’s facility on the other end. The following table lists
the pin assignment in the SCSI connector and the color of the wire connected to
the corresponding pin for the connection between the ADR-10000 ALARMS
connector and a distribution frame.
Table A-2: ALARMS client cable wiring
Pin Name Function Direction Wire color
1 COMMON_F Floating power supply Input Brown
common
2 — Not connected — —
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, – wire Input Brown/gray-ring
5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, – wire Input Red
7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, – wire Input Red/gray-ring
9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, – wire Input Orange
11 ALM_IN5 Alarm input 5, – wire Input Orange/gray-ring
12 ALM_O1NO/ Alarm output 1 Output/Input Yellow
IN6 NO/input 6,– wire
13 ALM_O1/IP6 Alarm output 1 Output/ Yellow/gray-ring
common/input 6, + wire Input
14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 NC Output Green
15 ALM_O2NO/ Alarm output 2 Output/ Green/gray-ring
IN7 NO/input 7, – wire Input
16 ALM_O2/IP7 Alarm output 2 Output/ Blue
common/input 7, + wire Input
17 ALM_O2NC Alarm output 2 NC Output Blue/gray-ring
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input Violet
19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm NC Input White
20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm NO Input White/gray-ring
21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common Pink
22 MAJ_NC Major alarm NC Input Pink/gray-ring
23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input Brown/white-ring
24 MAJ_NO Major alarm NO Input Red/white-ring
25 MIN_NC Minor alarm NC — Orange/white-ring
26 MIN_NO Minor alarm NO Input Yellow/white-ring
27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input Green/white-ring

28 WARN_NC Warning alarm NC Input Blue/white-ring
29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common — Violet/white-ring
30 WARN_NO Warning alarm NO — Light gray/white-ring
31 ALM_O3NO/ Alarm output 3 — Red/brown-ring
IN8 common/input 8,– wire
32 ALM_O3/IP8 Alarm output 3 Input Yellow/brown-ring
common/input 8, + wire
33 ALM_O3NC Alarm output 3 NC Input Orange/brown-ring
34 EXTA_SN2 External alarm sense 2 Input
35 BUZ_NO Audio alarm activation line Input Violet/gray-ring
36 EXTA_SN1 External alarm sense 1 Input
F-CHANNEL Connector
The F-CHANNEL connector is a 9-pin D-type male connector that provides a
serial RS-232 communication channel supporting SLIP. This connector is
intended for connection to a Craft terminal. The connection is made to one of
the serial RS-232 ports of the PC serving as a Craft terminal, using a crossed
cable.
connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment, together with the
corresponding pin in the Craft terminal serial RS-232 port (assuming that this
port uses a 9-pin connector).
Figure A-2: F-CHANNEL connector pin identification

Table A-3: F-CHANNEL connector pin assignment
Pin Name Function Direction Craft terminal serial port pin
1 — Not connected — Not connected
2 COM-F-RX F-channel receive Input Pin 3 (transmit output)
3 COM-F-TX F-channel transmit Output Pin 2 (receive input)
4 — Not connected — Not connected
5 GND Ground — Pin 5 (ground)
6, 7, — Not connected — Not connected
8, 9
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 Connectors

The T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors are 9-pin D-type male connectors,
each including two groups of lines:
| Clock input (T3 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface)

| Clock output (T4 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface)
The MAIN connector serves the main TMU, and the PROTECT connector
serves the standby (protection) TMU. They are connected to the site timing
reference distribution subsystem.
connector, and the table lists their pin assignment.
Figure A-3: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin identification

Table A-4: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin assignment
Pin Name Function Direction
1 SHIELD Shield -
2 CK_2M_MIL Clock input, low Input
3 SHIELD Shield -
4 CK_2M_MOL Clock output, low Output
5 — Not connected -
6 CK_2M_MIH Clock input, high Input
7 SHIELD Shield -
8 CK_2M_MOH Clock output, high Output
9 — Not connected -
ETHERNET Connectors
The two ETHERNET connectors located on the ECU300/ECU300-F panel,
designated MANAGEMENT MAIN and PROT/LCT, are 8-pin RJ-45
connectors that provide two Ethernet 10BaseT management interfaces (one for
each MXC300 card installed in the ADR-10000 shelf).
At any time, only the interface connected to the MXC300 serving as the current
main card is active; the interface connected to the MXC300 serving as the
protection card is in standby to provide protection for the out-of-band
management traffic.
Each ETHERNET connector is wired as a station port intended for direct
connection through a straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.

connector. The table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector.
Figure A-4: ETHERNET connectors pin identification

Table A-5: ETHERNET connectors pin assignment
Designation Function Direction
TX+ Transmit, + wire Output
TX– Transmit, – wire Output
RX+ Receive, + wire Input
N/C Not connected
RX– Receive, – wire Input
FGND Frame ground
N/C Not connected
MXC300 DC Input Power

Connectors
The DC input power connector, designated POWER, is a 5-pin D-type male
connector located on the MXC300 panel. The following figure identifies the
functions of the POWER connector pins, as seen when looking into the
connector.
Figure A-5: POWER input power connector pin functions

PIM2_21 Connection Data
The PIM2_21 provides 21 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and
has two 50-pin SCSI female connectors. The upper connector serves the E1
receive signals and the lower connector serves the E1 transmit signals.
connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for
unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the
shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cables offered by SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions
Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
UPPER
Pin 25 Pin 1
Pin 50 Pin 26
Pin 25 Pin 1
Pin 50 Pin 26
LOWER
Figure A-6: PIM2_21 E1 connectors pin identification
Table A-6: PIM2_21 receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment
1 RTIP1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Brown
2 RTIP2 Receive, tributary 2, wire A Input Red
3 RTIP3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Orange
4 RTIP4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Yellow
5 RTIP5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Green
6 RTIP6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Blue
7 RTIP7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Violet
8 GND Shield — Brown/green-ring
9 RTIP8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input White
10 RTIP9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Pink
11 RTIP10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input Brown/white-ring
12 RTIP11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Orange/white-ring
13 RTIP12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Green/white-ring
14 RTIP13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Violet/white-ring
15 RTIP14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Red/brown-ring
16 GND Shield — Light-gray/green-ring
17 RTIP15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input Orange/brown-ring

18 RTIP16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Blue/brown-ring
19 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Light-gray/brown-ring
20 RTIP18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Input Brown/red-ring
21 RTIP19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input Yellow/red-ring
22 RTIP20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input Blue/red-ring
23 RTIP21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input White/red-ring
24 GND Shield — Yellow/green-ring
26 GND Shield — Orange/green-ring
27 RRING1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Brown/gray-ring
28 RRING2 Receive, tributary 2, wire B Input Red/gray-ring
29 RRING3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Orange/gray-ring
30 RRING4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Yellow/gray-ring
31 RRING5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Green/gray-ring
32 RRING6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input Blue/gray-ring
33 RRING7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Violet/gray-ring
34 GND Shield — Violet/green-ring
35 RRING8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input White/gray-ring
36 RRING9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Pink/gray-ring
37 RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input Red/white-ring
38 RRING11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Yellow/white-ring
39 RRING12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Blue/white-ring
40 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Light-gray/white-ring
41 RRING14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B Input Yellow/brown-ring
42 GND Shield — Blue/green-ring
43 RRING15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input Green/brown-ring
44 RRING16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Violet/brown-ring
45 RRING17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Pink/brown-ring
46 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Light-gray/red-ring
47 RRING19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Green/red-ring
48 RRING20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Violet/red-ring
49 RRING21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Pink/red-ring
50 GND Shield — Pink/green-ring

Table A-7: PIM2_21 transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment
1 TTIP1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Brown/yellow-ring
2 TTIP2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Orange/yellow-ring
3 TTIP3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output Blue/yellow-ring
4 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Light-gray/yellow-ring
5 TTIP5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Output Brown/blue-ring
6 TTIP6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Orange/blue-ring
7 TTIP7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Green/blue-ring
8 GND Shield — Pink/orange-ring
9 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Light-gray/blue-ring
10 TTIP9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Brown/orange-ring
11 TTIP10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Yellow/orange-ring
12 TTIP11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Blue/orange-ring
13 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Light-gray/orange-ring
14 TTIP13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Output Brown/violet-ring
15 TTIP14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Orange/violet-ring
16 GND Shield — Pink/blue-ring
17 TTIP15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Output Green/violet-ring
18 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Light-gray/violet-ring
19 TTIP17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Output Brown/pink-ring
20 TTIP18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Output Orange/pink-ring
21 TTIP19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Output Green/pink-ring
22 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Light-gray/pink-ring
23 TTIP21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Output Pink/violet-ring
24 GND Shield — Pink/white-ring
26 GND Shield — White/brown-ring
27 TRING1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Output Red/yellow-ring
28 TRING2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output Green/yellow-ring
29 TRING3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Output Violet/yellow-ring
30 TRING4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output White/yellow-ring
31 TRING5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output Red/blue-ring
32 TRING6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Yellow/blue-ring
33 TRING7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Violet/blue-ring
34 GND Shield — Black
35 TRING8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output White/blue-ring
36 TRING9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Red/orange-ring
37 TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Green/orange-ring
38 TRING11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output Violet/orange-ring

39 TRING12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Output White/orange-ring
40 TRING13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Output Red/violet-ring
41 TRING14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Output Yellow/violet-ring
42 GND Shield — Black/white-ring
43 TRING15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Output Blue/violet-ring
44 TRING16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Output White/violet-ring
45 TRING17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Output Red/pink-ring
46 TRING18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Output Yellow/pink-ring
47 TRING19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Output Blue/pink-ring
48 TRING20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Output White/pink-ring
49 TRING21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Output Pink/yellow-ring
50 GND Shield — Black/yellow
PIM2_42 Connection Data

The PIM2_42 provides 42 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and
has two 100-pin SCSI female connectors. The upper connector serves the first
21 E1s (#1 to #21) receive and transmit signals, and the lower connector serves
the second 21 E1s (#22 to #42) receive and transmit signals.
connector. The tables lists the pin assignment for a typical connector (for
unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the
shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the
Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Figure A-7: PIM2_42 E1 connectors pin identification

Table A-8: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines upper connector (1-21) pin assignment
1 CGND Shield — Brown/green-ring
2 CGND Shield — Light Gray/green-ring

23 CGND Shield — Violet/green-ring
24 CGND Shield — Blue/green-ring
25 CGND Shield — Pink/orange-ring
26 CGND Shield — Pink/blue-ring
33 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Light gray/yellow-ring
41 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Light gray/blue-ring

49 CGND Shield — Pink/white-ring
50 CGND Shield — White/brown-ring
51 CGND Shield — Yellow/green-ring
52 CGND Shield — Orange/green-ring
58 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Light gray/white-ring

65 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Light gray/brown-ring
68 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Light gray/red-ring
75 CGND Shield — Pink/green-ring
76 CGND Shield — White/green-ring
77 CGND Shield — Black
78 CGND Shield — Black/white-ring
79 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Light gray/orange-ring

87 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Light gray/violet-ring
95 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Light gray/pink-ring
99 CGND Shield — Black/yellow-ring
100 CGND Shield — Black/pink-ring
Table A-9: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines lower connector (22-42) pin assignment
1 CGND Shield — Brown/green-ring
2 CGND Shield — Light Gray/green-ring
23 CGND Shield — Violet/green-ring

24 CGND Shield — Blue/green-ring
25 CGND Shield — Pink/orange-ring
26 CGND Shield — Pink/blue-ring
33 TTIP25 Transmit, tributary 25, wire A Output Light gray/yellow-ring
41 TTIP29 Transmit, tributary 29, wire A Output Light gray/blue-ring
49 CGND Shield — Pink/white-ring
50 CGND Shield — White/brown-ring
51 CGND Shield — Yellow/green-ring
52 CGND Shield — Orange/green-ring
58 RRING34 Receive, tributary 34, wire B Input Light gray/white-ring

65 RTIP38 Receive, tributary 38, wire A Input Light gray/brown-ring
68 RRING39 Receive, tributary 39, wire B Input Light gray/red-ring
71 RTIP41 Receive, tributary 41 wire A Input Blue/red-ring
75 CGND Shield — Pink/green-ring
76 CGND Shield — White/green-ring
77 CGND Shield — Black
78 CGND Shield — Black/white-ring
79 TTIP33 Transmit, tributary 33, wire A Output Light gray/orange-ring
87 TTIP37 Transmit, tributary 37, wire A Output Light gray/violet-ring
95 TTIP41 Transmit, tributary 41, wire A Output Light gray/pink-ring
99 CGND Shield — Black/yellow-ring
100 CGND Shield — Black/pink-ring

PIM2_63/B Connection Data
The PIM2_63/B provides 63 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and
has three pairs of 50-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector pair supports
21 E1 interfaces. The upper connector in each pair serves the E1 receive signals
and the lower the E1 transmit signals. The tributaries and type of signal (IN for
receive, OUT for transmit) supported by each connector are marked near the
connector: IN 1-21, OUT 1-21, IN 22-42, OUT 22-42, IN 43-63, and OUT
43-63.
The following figure identifies the connector pins in each pair as seen when
looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical
connector pair (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor,
and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by SAGEMCOM’s
Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a
distribution frame. The tributary numbers appearing in these tables are given
for the IN 1-21 and OUT 1-21 connectors. To obtain the correct tributary
numbers for the other connectors, interpret the numbers as representing the
number of the tributary in its group (for example, in connectors IN 22-42 and
OUT 22-42, 7 represents E1 tributary 28; in connectors IN 43-63 and OUT
43-63, 12 represents E1 tributary 57).
UPPER
Pin 25 Pin 1
Pin 50 Pin 26
Pin 25 Pin 1
Pin 50 Pin 26
LOWER
Figure A-8: PIM2_63/B typical pair connectors pin identification
Table A-10: PIM2_63/B typical receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment
8 GND Shield — Brown/green-ring

16 GND Shield — Light-gray/green-ring
19 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Light-gray/brown-ring
24 GND Shield — Yellow/green-ring
26 GND Shield — Orange/green-ring
34 GND Shield — Violet/green-ring
40 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Light-gray/white-ring
42 GND Shield — Blue/green-ring

46 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Light-gray/red-ring
50 GND Shield — Pink/green-ring
Table A-11: PIM2_63 typical transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment
4 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Light-gray/yellow-ring
8 GND Shield — Pink/orange-ring
9 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Light-gray/blue-ring
13 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Light-gray/orange-ring
16 GND Shield — Pink/blue-ring
18 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Light-gray/violet-ring
22 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Light-gray/pink-ring
24 GND Shield — Pink/white-ring
26 GND Shield — White/brown-ring

34 GND Shield — Black
42 GND Shield — Black/white-ring
50 GND Shield — Black/yellow

EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors
EISMB_804 and DIOM_04 are GbE/Fast Ethernet modules that provide
electrical 10/100/1000BaseT ports. DIOM_08 is a Fast Ethernet module that
provides 10/100BaseT ports. MCSM in an MPLS Core Switch module that
provides 10/100BaseT ports. All these modules use 8-pin RJ-45 connectors for
the electrical ports.
connector. The first table lists the pin out for a 10/100BaseT interface and the
second for a 1000BaseT interface.
Figure A-9: 10/100BaseT connectors pin identification

Table A-12: 10/100BaseT connectors pin assignment
Pin Designation Function Direction
1 TD+ Transmit, + wire Output
2 TD– Transmit, – wire Output
3 RD+ Receive, + wire Input
6 RD– Receive, – wire Input
Table A-13: 1000BaseT connector pin assignment
Pin Designation Function Direction
1 TR1P Transmit/Receive, pair 1, + wire I/O

2 TR1N Transmit/Receive, pair 1, – wire I/O
3 TR2P Transmit/Receive, pair 2, + wire I/O
4 TR2N Transmit/Receive, pair 2 – wire I/O
5 TR3P Transmit/Receive, pair 3 + wire I/O
7 TR4P Transmit/Receive, pair 4 + wire I/O

xRAP-D/xRAP-B Connectors
This section provides information on the connectors located on the xRAP-D
and xRAP-B units.
Platform DC Input Power Connectors

The platform DC input power connectors, designated Shelf 1 and Shelf 2, are
5-pin D-type male connectors. The following figure identifies the functions of
the platform DC input connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-10: xRAP-D and xRAP-B shelf DC input power connector pin functions
SHELF Alarm Connectors

The SHELF alarm connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each
connector is connected to the ALARMS connector of an ADR-10000 platform.
Refer to ALARMS Connector (on page A-1) for description. The following
figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector,
and the table lists the pin assignment for this connector.
Pin 18 Pin 1
Pin 36 Pin 19
Figure A-11: SHELF alarm connector pin identification

Table A-14: SHELF alarm connector pin assignment
1 N/C Not connected --
2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire Input
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, – wire Input

10 ALM_O4 Alarm output 4 Output
12 GND Ground --
15 GND Ground --
18 BUZZ Buzzer Input
20 GND Ground --
21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm Output
23 MAJ_COM Major alarm Output
24 GND Ground --
26 GND Ground --
27 MIN_COM Minor alarm Output
29 WARN_COM Warning alarm Output
30 GND Ground --
32 GND Ground --
35 GND Ground --

ALARMS Connector
The ALARMS connector is a SCSI 68-pin female connector that carries the
following groups of lines to the customer equipment:
| Eight external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the ADR-
10000 platforms. Four inputs are allocated to each ADR-10000 platform.
Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the
customer’s facility.
| Eight sets of change-over relay contacts floating with respect to platform
ground, which serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Four outputs are allocated
to each ADR-10000 platform connected to the xRAP-B/xRAP-D.
| Eight sets of change-over relay contacts (four per platform) floating with
respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) alarm indication
lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are
activated by the corresponding alarm relays of ADR-10000 platforms.
| Two sets of change-over relay contacts floating with respect to platform
ground, which serve as Critical alarm buzzer activation signal. The relay is
activated whenever a Critical alarm is detected in the corresponding
platform. The signal can be used to activate a local buzzer (Critical buzzer)
in the customer's alarms collecting system.
| Two lines for muting the Critical buzzer in the customer's alarms collecting
system.
Relay contact ratings are 57.6 V in open state, and 1A in closed state.
The following figure identifies the ALARMS connector pins as seen when
looking into the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the ALARMS
connector. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
Division for connecting between the ALARMS connector and a distribution
frame.
Figure A-12: ALARMS connector pin identification

Table A-15: ALARMS connector pin assignment
Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color
Shelf 2 1 CRIT_NC Critical alarm Output Black

relay, normally
closed contact
2 CRIT_COM Critical alarm Output Brown
relay, common
contact
3 CRIT_NO Critical alarm Output Red
relay, normally
open contact
4 MAJ_NC Major alarm relay, Output Orange
normally closed
contact
5 MAJ_COM Major alarm relay, Output Yellow
common contact
6 MAJ_NO Major alarm relay, Output Green
normally open
contact
7 MIN_NC Minor alarm relay, Output Blue
normally closed
contact
8 MIN_COM Minor alarm relay, Output Violet
common contact
9 MIN_NO Minor alarm relay, Output Gray
normally open
contact
10 WARN_NC Warning alarm Output White
relay, normally
closed contact
11 WARN_COM Warning alarm Output Pink
relay, common
contact
12 WARN_NO Warning alarm Output Light green
relay, normally
open contact
13 BUZZ_NC Buzzer relay, Output Black/white
normally closed
contact
14 BUZZ_COM Buzzer relay, Output Brown/
common contact white
15 BUZZ_NO Buzzer relay, Output Red/white
normally open
contact
16 ALMO1_NC Output relay 1, Output Orange/
normally closed white
contact
17 ALMO1_COM Output relay 1, Output Green/
common contact white

18 ALMO1_NO Output relay 1, Output Blue/white

normally open
contact
19 ALMO2_NC Output relay 2, Output Violet/
normally closed white
contact
20 ALMO2_COM Output relay 2, Output Red/black
common contact
21 ALMO2_NO Output relay 2, Output Orange/
normally open black
contact
22 ALMO3_NC Output relay 3, Output Yellow/
normally closed black
contact
23 ALMO3_COM Output relay 3, Output Green/
common contact black
24 ALMO3_NO Output relay 3, Output Gray/black
normally open
contact
25 ALMO4_NC Output relay 4, Output Pink/black
normally closed
contact
26 ALMO4_COM Output relay 4, Output Pink/green
common contact
27 ALMO4_NO Output relay 4, Output Pink/red
normally open
contact
28 ALMIN_1 External alarm Input Pink/violet
input 1
29 ALMIN_2 External alarm Input Light blue
input 2
30 GND ground Light
blue/brown
31 ALMIN_3 External alarm Input Light
input 3 blue/red
32 ALMIN_4 External alarm Input Light
input 4 blue/violet
33 GND ground Light
blue/black
34 BUZZ_OFF Buzzer mute Output Gray/green

Shelf 1 35 CRIT_NC Critical alarm Output Gray/red

relay, normally
closed contact
36 CRIT_COM Critical alarm Output Gray/violet
relay, common
contact
37 CRIT_NO Critical alarm Output Light
relay, normally green/black
open contact
38 MAJ_NC Major alarm relay, Output Violet/black
normally closed
contact
39 MAJ_COM Major alarm relay, Output Black/white
common contact dots
40 MAJ_NO Major alarm relay, Output Brown/
normally open white dots
contact
41 MIN_NC Minor alarm relay, Output Red/white
normally closed dots
contact
42 MIN_COM Minor alarm relay, Output Orange/
common contact white dots
43 MIN_NO Minor alarm relay, Output Green/
normally open white dots
contact
44 WARN_NC Warning alarm Output Blue/white
relay, normally dots
closed contact
45 WARN_COM Warning alarm Output Violet/
relay, common white dots
contact
46 WARN_NO Warning alarm Output White/
relay, normally black dots
open contact
47 BUZZ_NC Buzzer relay, Output Yellow/
normally closed black dots
contact
48 BUZZ_COM Buzzer relay, Output Green/
common contact black dots
49 BUZZ_NO Buzzer relay, Output Light blue/
normally open black dots
contact
50 ALMO1_NC Output relay 1, Output Pink/black
contact
51 ALMO1_COM Output relay 1, Output Red/black
common contact dots

52 ALMO1_NO Output relay 1, Output Orange/

normally open black dots
contact
53 ALMO2_NC Output relay 2, Output Violet/black
contact
54 ALMO2_COM Output relay 2, Output Gray/black
common contact dots
55 ALMO2_NO Output relay 2, Output Orange/red

normally open dots
contact
56 ALMO3_NC Output relay 3, Output Yellow/red
contact
57 ALMO3_COM Output relay 3, Output Green/red

common contact dots
58 ALMO3_NO Output relay 3, Output Blue/red
normally open dots
contact
59 ALMO4_NC Output relay 4, Output Violet/red
contact
60 ALMO4_COM Output relay 4, Output Gray/red
common contact dots
61 ALMO4_NO Output relay 4, Output White/red
normally open dots
contact
62 ALMIN_1 External alarm Input Pink/red
input 1 dots
63 ALMIN_2 External alarm Input Yellow/
input 2 white
64 GND ground Gray/white
65 ALMIN_3 External alarm Input Pink/white

input 3
66 ALMIN_4 External alarm Input Brown/
input 4 black
67 GND ground Blue/black
68 BUZZ_OFF Buzzer mute Output Gray/white

dots

B
Standards Compliance
The following is a list of standards and reference documents that relate to the
ADR family.
1. Af-phy-0064.000 – ATM Forum E1 Physical Layer Interface.
2. Af-phy-0086.000 – ATM Forum IMA V1.0.
3. Af-phy-0086.001 – ATM Forum IMA V1.1.
4. Af-phy-00121.00 – ATM Forum Traffic Management Specifications
V4.1.
5. ANSI T1.105-2001 – Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) - Basic
Description including Multiplex Structure, Rates, and Formats.
6. BS ISO/IEC-3309 – Information Technology – Telecommunications and
Information Exchange between Systems – High-Level Data Link Control
(HDLC) Procedures – Frame Structure.
7. BS ISO/IEC-9595, Information Technology – Open Systems
Interconnection – Common Management Information Services.
8. EN- 60950-1 ed1 (2001/10) – Electrical Safety.
9. ETS 300 386 (2003/01) – Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio
spectrum Matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.
10. ETS 300 132 -2 (2003/03) – Environmental Engineering (EE); Power
Supply Interface at the Input to Telecommunications Equipment.
11. ETSI ETR 114 – Functional Architecture of SDH Transport Networks.
12. ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 (2003/04) – Environmental Engineering (EE);
Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for
Telecommunications Equipment; Storage.
Telecommunications Equipment; Transportation.

Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page B-1
Telecommunications Equipment; Stationary use at weather protected
location.
15. FTZ 1 TR9 (2002/06) - Deutsche Telekom A.G. EMC Requirements.
16. GR-1089-CORE (2006/06) – Electromagnetic Compatibility and
Electrical Safety – Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications
Equipment.
17. GR-1209-CORE (2001/03) – Generic Requirements for Passive Optical
Components.
18. GR-1230-CORE – SONET Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring Equipment
Generic Criteria.
19. GR-1312-CORE (1999/04) – Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber
Amplifiers and Proprietary Dense Wavelength-Division Multiplexed
Systems.
20. GR-1400-CORE – SONET Dual-Fed Unidirectional Path Switched Ring
(UPSR) Equipment Generic Criteria.
21. GR-253-CORE (2000/09) – Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
Transport Systems: Common Generic Criteria.
22. GR-383-CORE – COMMON LANGUAGE® Equipment Codes
(CLEI™ Codes) – Generic Requirements for Bar Code Labels.
23. GR-63-CORE (2006/03) – Network Equipment Building System (NEBS)
Requirements: Physical Protection.
24. IEC-68 – Environmental Testing.
25. IEC 917 – Modular Order for the Development of Mechanical Structures
for Electronic Equipment Practices.
26. IEC 60825-1 (2001/08): Safety of Laser Products – Part 1: Equipment
Classification, Requirements, and User Guide.
27. IEC 60825-2 (2000/05): Safety of Laser Products – Part 2: Safety of
Optical Fiber Communication System.
28. IEEE 802.1ad - Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks—Revision—
Amendment 4: Provider Bridges.
29. IEEE 802.1D - Media access control (MAC) Bridges (Incorporates IEEE
802.1t-2001 and IEEE 802.1w).
30. IEEE 802.1P - Traffic Class Expediting and Dynamic Multicast Filtering.
31. IEEE 802.1Q - Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks—Revision.
32. IEEE 802.1w - Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree.
33. IEEE 802.3-2005 – Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer
Specifications.

34. IEEE 802.3ad – Link Aggregation.
35. IEEE 802.3ah – Ethernet in the First Mile (Link OAM).
36. IEEE 802.3x - Full Duplex Operation and Flow Control Protocol.
37. IETF, RFC-1493 – Definition of Managed Objects for Bridges.
38. IETF, RFC-1643 - Ethernet-like Interfaces.
39. IETF, RFC-1662 – PPP in HDLC-Life Framing.
40. IETF, RFC-1757 - Remote Network Monitoring Management
Information Base.
41. IETF, RFC-2108 – Definitions of Managed Objects for IEEE 802.3
Repeater Devices using SMIv2.
42. IETF, RFC 2401 – Security Architecture for the Internet Protocol.
43. IETF, RFC 2409 – Internet Key Exchange Protocol (IKE).
44. IETF, RFC-2615 – PPP over SONET/SDH.
45. IETF, RFC-2665 – Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet-like
Interface Types.
46. IETF, RFC-2674 - Bridge MIB with VLAN/Traffic Classes/Multicast
Extensions.
47. IETF, RFC-2702 - Requirements for Traffic Engineering Over MPLS.
48. IETF, RFC-2737 – Entity MIB (Version 2).
49. IETF, RFC-2819 – Remote Network Monitoring Management
Information Base.
50. IETF, RFC-2863 - Interfaces Group MIB.
51. IETF, RFC-3031 - Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture.
52. IETF, RFC-3032 - MPLS Label Stack Encoding.
53. IETF, RFC-3270 - Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of
Differentiated Services.
54. IETF, RFC-3443 - Time To Live (TTL) Processing in Multi-Protocol
Label Switching (MPLS) Networks.
55. IETF, RFC-3812 - Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Traffic
Engineering (TE) Management Information Base (MIB).
56. IETF, RFC-3813 - Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label
Switching Router (LSR) Management Information Base (MIB).
57. IETF,RFC-3916 - Requirements for Pseudo-Wire Emulation
Edge-to-Edge (PWE3).
58. IETF, RFC-3985 - Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)
Architecture.
59. IETF, RFC-4090 - Fast Reroute Extensions to RSVP-TE for LSP
Tunnels.

60. IETF, RFC-4125 - Maximum Allocation Bandwidth Constraints Model
for Diffserv-aware MPLS Traffic Engineering.
61. IETF, RFC-4126 - Max Allocation with Reservation Bandwidth
Constraints Model for Diffserv-aware MPLS Traffic Engineering &
Performance Comparisons.
62. IETF, RFC-4379 - Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS)
Data Plane Failures.
63. IETF, RFC-4448 - Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Ethernet over
MPLS Networks.
64. IETF Drafts:
a. Martini encapsulation, draft-martini-l2circuit-encap-mpls.
b. VPLS draft, draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-ldp.
c. draft-ietf-pwe3-ethernet-encap.
d. draft-sajassi-l2vpn-vpls-multicast-congruency.
e. draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-mcast-reqts.
f. draft-ietf-magma-snoop.
g. draft-ietf-mpls-rsvp-te-p2mp.
h. draft-vasseur-mpls-backup-computation.
65. ISO 9595, ISO 9596 – CMISE Specification.
66. ITU-T Recommendation I.356 – ATM Layer Cell Transfer Performance.
67. ITU-T Recommendation I.361 – ATM Layer Specification.
68. ITU-T Recommendation I.371 – Traffic Control and Congestion Control.
69. ITU-T Recommendation I.610 – ATM Operation and Maintenance
Principles.
70. ITU-T Recommendation G.650 – Definition and Test Methods for the
Relevant Parameters of Single-Mode Fibers.
71. ITU-T Recommendation G.651 (1998/02) – Characteristics of a 50/125
µm Multimode Graded Index Optical Fiber Cable.
72. ITU-T Recommendation G.652 (2006/05) – Characteristics of a
Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable.
73. ITU-T RecommendationG.653 (2003/12) – Characteristics of a
Dispersion-Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable.
74. ITU-T RecommendationG.654 (2004/06) – Characteristics of a Cut-off
Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable.
75. ITU-T Recommendation G.655 (2006/06) – Characteristics of a
Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable.
76. ITU-T Recommendation G.661 (2006/03) – Definition and Test Methods
for the Relevant Generic Parameters of Optical Amplifier Devices and
Subsystems.

77. ITU-T Recommendation G.662 (2005/07) – Generic Characteristics of
Optical Fiber Amplifier Devices and Subsystems.
78. ITU-T Recommendation G.663 (2000/04) – Application Related Aspects
of Optical Fiber Amplifier Devices and Subsystems.
79. ITU-T Recommendation G.664 (2006/03) – Optical Safety Procedures
and Requirements for Optical Transport Systems.
80. ITU-T Recommendation G.671 (2005/01) – Transmission Characteristics
of Passive Optical Components.
81. ITU-T Recommendation G.691 (2006/03) – Optical Interfaces for Single
Channel SDH Systems with Optical Amplifiers and STM-64 Systems
(Draft).
82. ITU-T Recommendation G.692 (1998/10) – Optical Interfaces for
Multi-Channel Systems with Optical Amplifiers.
83. ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1 (2002/06) – Spectral Grids for WDM
Applications: DWDM Frequency Grid.
84. ITU-T Recommendation G.694.2 (2003/12) – Spectral Grids for WDM
Applications: CWDM Wavelength Grid.
85. ITU-T Recommendation G.695 (2005/01) – Optical Interfaces for Coarse
Wavelength Division Multiplexing Applications.
86. ITU-T Recommendation G.703 (2001/11) – Physical/Electrical
Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces.
87. ITU-T Recommendation G.704 (1998/10) – Synchronous Frame
Structures Used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736 kbps Hierarchical
Levels.
88. ITU-T Recommendation G.706 – Frame Alignment and CRC Procedures
Relating to Basic Frame Structure Defined in Rec G.704.
89. ITU-T Recommendation G.707 – Network Node Interface for the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy.
90. ITU-T Recommendation G.709 – Network Node Interface for OTN.
91. ITU-T Recommendation G.772 (1988/11) – Protected Monitoring Points
Provided on Digital Transmission Systems.
92. ITU-T Recommendation G.774 & G774.n – SDH Information Model.
93. ITU-T Recommendation G.781 – Synchronization Layer Functions.
94. ITU-T Recommendation G.783 – Characteristics of SDH Equipment
Functional Blocks.
95. ITU-T Recommendation G.784 – Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
Management.
96. ITU-T Recommendation G.798 – Characteristics of OTN Hierarchy
Equipment Functional Blocks.

97. ITU-T Recommendation G.803 – Architectures of Transport Networks
based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy.
98. ITU-T Recommendation G.805 – Generic Functional Architecture of
Transport Networks.
99. ITU-T Recommendation G.806 – Characteristics of Transport Equipment
–Description Methodology and Generic Functionality.
100. ITU-T Recommendation G.811 (1996/09) – Timing Characteristics of
Primary Reference Clocks.
101. ITU-T Recommendation G.812 (2004/06) – Timing Requirements of
Slave Clocks Suitable for Use as Node Clocks in Synchronization
Networks.
102. ITU-T Recommendation G.813 (2003/03) – Timing Characteristics of
SDH Equipment Slave Clocks (SEC).
103. ITU-T Recommendation G.823 (2000/03) – The Control of Jitter and
Wander within Digital Networks Based on the 2048 kbit/s Hierarchy.
Wander within Digital Networks Based on the SDH (Draft).
Wander within the Optical Transport Network (OTN).
106. ITU-T Recommendation G.826 – Error Performance Parameters and
Objectives for International, Constant Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above
the Primary Rate.
107. ITU-T Recommendation G.828 – Error Performance Parameters and
Objectives for International, Constant Bit Rate Synchronous Digital
Paths.
108. ITU-T Recommendation G.829 – Error Performance Events for SDH
Multiplex and Regenerator Sections.
109. ITU-T Recommendation G.841 – Types and Characteristics of SDH
Network Protection Architectures.
110. ITU-T Recommendation G.842 – Inter-Working of SDH Protection
Architectures.
111. ITU-T Recommendation G.872 – Architecture of Optical Transport
Networks.
112. ITU-T Recommendation G.874 – Management Aspects of the Optical
Transport Network Element.
113. ITU-T Recommendation G.875 – OTN Management Information Model
for the NE View.
114. ITU-T Recommendation G.957 (2006/03) – Optical Interfaces for
Equipment and Systems relating to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy.
115. ITU-T Recommendation G.959.1 (2006/03) – Optical Transport Network
Physical Layer Interfaces.

116. ITU-T Recommendation G.975 – Forward Error Correction for
Submarine Systems.
117. ITU-T Recommendation G.7041 – Generic Framing Procedure (GFP).
118. ITU-T Recommendation G.7042 – Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
(LCAS) for Virtual Concatenated Signals.
119. ITU-T Recommendation G.8010/Y.1306 - Architecture of Ethernet
Layer Networks.
120. ITU-T Recommendation G.8011/Y.1307 - Ethernet Services Framework.
121. ITU-T Recommendation G.8011.1/Y.1307.1 - Ethernet Private Line
Service.
122. ITU-T Recommendation G.8011.2/Y.1307.2 - Ethernet Virtual Private
Line Service.
123. ITU-T Recommendation G.8012/Y.1308 - Ethernet UNI and Ethernet
NNI.
124. ITU-T Recommendation Y.1710 - Requirements for Operation &
Maintenance functionality for MPLS networks.
125. ITU-T Recommendation Y.1711 - Operation & Maintenance mechanism
for MPLS networks.
126. ITU-T Recommendation M.3010 – Principles for a Telecommunications
Management Network.
127. ITU-T Recommendation M.3100 – Generic Network Information Model.
128. ITU-T Recommendation Q.821 – Alarm Surveillance.
129. ITU-T Recommendation Q.822 – Performance Monitoring.
130. ITU-T Recommendations X.217, X.227 – ACSE Specification.
131. ITU-T Recommendations X.219, X.229 – ROSE Specification.
132. ITU-T Recommendation X.721 Information Technology – Open Systems
Interconnection – Structure of Management Information: Definition of
Management Information.
133. MEF4 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 1: Generic
Framework.
134. MEF6 Metro Ethernet Services Definitions.
135. MEF7 EMS-NMS Information Model.
136. MEF9 Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI.
137. MEF10 Ethernet Service Attributes.
138. MEF11 User Network Interface (UNI) Requirements and Framework.
139. MEF12 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 2:
Ethernet Services Layer.
140. MEF14 Test Suite for Ethernet Traffic Management.

141. NIST, FIPS PUB 197 – Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).
142. NIST, FIPS 140-2 – Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules.
143. UL 60950 (2002/03): Safety of Information Technology Equipment.

If you encounter problems during installation or use, do
not hesitate to:
CONTACT OUR "SDH PRODUCTS" HOTLINE
ON A SINGLE TELEPHONE NUMBER:

in mainland France : 01 57 61 16 16
or from abroad : 33 1 57 61 16 16
ON A SINGLE FAX NUMBER:

in mainland France : 01 57 61 16 60
or from abroad : 33 1 57 61 16 60
ON A SINGLE Email address:

hotline.arp@sagemcom.com
Don't forget to provide yourself with your customer

number
which is written on your invoice.
Registered office: 250, route de l'Empereur, 92848 RUEIL MALMAISON CEDEX
Tel.: +33 (0) 1 57 61 10 00 - Fax: +33 (0)1 57 61 10 10
http://www.sagemcom.com

ADR-10000-I&M MANUAL - 8.1 253359436-A - Ed01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

ADR-10000-I&M MANUAL - 8.1 253359436-A - Ed01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ADR-10000-I&M MANUAL - 8.1 253359436-A - Ed01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ADD-DROP MULTIPLEXER STM-64

Installation and Maintenance Manual

253 359 436-A

3 000 358 607 R11 000 01

September 2010 Issue

(A new edition replaces any previous versions)

No Date Change description Page

Before You Start/Safety Guidelines .......................................1-1

Site Preparation and Rack Installation ..................................3-1

Platform Installation ................................................................4-1

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

Card and Module Installation..................................................5-1

Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing.................6-1

Commissioning Tests .............................................................7-1

Connector Pin Assignments.................................................. A-1

Standards Compliance........................................................... B-1

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on

TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information

IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential

Registered office: 250, route de l'Empereur, 92848 RUEIL MALMAISON CEDEX

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

WARNING: ADR equipment (the "ADR Equipment" or the

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

NOTE: This chapter includes translations of some of the

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

General Safety Requirements

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

WARNING: When installing the Equipment, the ground connection must

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

WARNING: To prevent possible damage to ADR equipment,

Power Supply Requirements

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

WARNING: When connecting power, follow this wiring sequence: ground

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253 359 436-A

WARNING: Before working on the Equipment or near the power entries,